all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 4.05 MiB | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Manual rev 2 | Users Manual | 2.97 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | August 10 2017 / October 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | August 10 2017 / October 10 2017 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
Test Report (NII) rev 3 | Test Report | 1.44 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report |
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.05 MiB | August 10 2017 / November 10 2017 |
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router REV4.0.2 1910011613 COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice. is a registered trademark of TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation, transformation, or adaptation without permission from TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright 2016 TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved. http://www.tp-link.com FCC STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference. 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Note: The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, this grant is applicable to only Mobile Configurations. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. This device is restricted in indoor environment only. CE Mark Warning This is a class B product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. OPERATING FREQUENCY(the maximum transmitted power) 2412MHz2472MHz (20dBm) 5180MHz5240MHz (23dBm) EU declaration of conformity TP-Link hereby declares that the device is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of directives 2014/53/EU, 2009/125/EC and 2011/65/EU. The original EU declaration of conformity may be found at http://www.tp-link.com/en/ce Canadian Compliance Statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause interference, and 2 This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes :
1) 2) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage;
lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, meme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement. This radio transmitter (IC: 8853A-C7/ Model: Archer C7) has been approved by Industry Canada to operate with the antenna types listed below with the maximum permissible gain indicated. Antenna types not included in this list (Appendix C), having a gain greater than the maximum gain indicated for that type, are strictly prohibited for use with this device. Le prsent metteur radio (IC: 8853A-C7/ Model: Archer C7) a t approuv par Industrie Canada pour fonctionner avec les types d'antenne numrs ci-dessous et ayant un gain admissible maximal. Les types d'antenne non inclus dans cette liste (Annexe C), et dont le gain est suprieur au gain maximal indiqu, sont strictement interdits pour l'exploitation de l'metteur. Caution:
1 The device for operation in the band 51505250 MHz is only for indoor use to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems;
2 For devices with detachable antenna(s), the maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725-5850 MHz shall be such that the equipment still complies with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non-point-to-point operation as appropriate; and The high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250-5350 MHz and 5650-5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Avertissement:
1 Le dispositif fonctionnant dans la bande 5150-5250 MHz est rserv uniquement pour une utilisation lintrieur afin de rduire les risques de brouillage prjudiciable aux systmes de satellites mobiles utilisant les mmes canaux;
2 Le gain maximal d'antenne permis pour les dispositifs avec antenne(s) amovible(s) utilisant la bande 5725-5850 MHz doit se conformer la limitation P.I.R.E spcifie pour lexploitation point point et non point point, selon le cas. En outre, les utilisateurs devraient aussi tre aviss que les utilisateurs de radars de haute puissance sont dsigns utilisateurs principaux (c.--d., quils ont la priorit) pour les bandes 5250-5350 MHz et 5650-5850 MHz et que ces radars pourraient causer du brouillage et/ou des dommages aux dispositifs LAN-EL. Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator & your body. Dclaration d'exposition aux radiations:
Cet quipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements IC tablies pour un environnement non contrl. Cet quipement doit tre install et utilis avec un minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source de rayonnement et votre corps. Industry Canada Statement CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3(B) Korea Warning Statements
. NCC Notice BSMI Notice Safety Information When product has power button, the power button is one of the way to shut off the product;
when there is no power button, the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the product or the power adapter from the power source. Dont disassemble the product, or make repairs yourself. You run the risk of electric shock and voiding the limited warranty. If you need service, please contact us. Avoid water and wet locations. Adapter shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible. The plug considered as disconnect device of adapter. Explanation of the symbols on the product label Symbol Explanation DC voltage RECYCLING This product bears the selective sorting symbol for Waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). This means that this product must be handled pursuant to European directive 2012/19/EU in order to be recycled or dismantled to minimize its impact on the environment. User has the choice to give his product to a competent recycling organization or to the retailer when he buys a new electrical or electronic equipment. CONTENTS Package Contents ..................................................................................................... 1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 2 Chapter 1. 1.1 Overview of the Router ................................................................................................. 2 1.2 Conventions .................................................................................................................. 3 1.3 Main Features ............................................................................................................... 3 1.4 Panel Layout ................................................................................................................. 4 1.4.1 The Front Panel ................................................................................................ 4 1.4.2 The Rear Panel ................................................................................................. 5 Chapter 2. Connecting the Router ....................................................................... 7 2.1 System Requirements .................................................................................................. 7 2.2 Installation Environment Requirements ........................................................................ 7 2.3 Connecting the Router .................................................................................................. 7 Chapter 3. Quick Installation Guide ..................................................................... 9 3.1 TCP/IP Configuration .................................................................................................... 9 3.2 Quick Installation Guide .............................................................................................. 11 Chapter 4. Configuring the Router .................................................................... 21 4.1 Login ........................................................................................................................... 21 4.2 Status .......................................................................................................................... 21 4.3 Quick Setup ................................................................................................................ 23 4.4 Network ....................................................................................................................... 23 4.4.1 WAN ................................................................................................................ 23 4.4.2 LAN ................................................................................................................. 32 4.4.3 MAC Clone ...................................................................................................... 33 4.4.4 IPTV ................................................................................................................ 34 4.5 Dual Band Selection ................................................................................................... 34 4.6 Wireless 2.4GHz ......................................................................................................... 35 4.6.1 Wireless Settings ............................................................................................ 35 4.6.2 WPS ................................................................................................................ 37 4.6.3 Wireless Security ............................................................................................ 39 4.6.4 Wireless MAC Filtering ................................................................................... 42 4.6.5 Wireless Advanced ......................................................................................... 45 4.6.6 Wireless Statistics ........................................................................................... 46
- I -
4.7 Wireless 5GHz ............................................................................................................ 47 4.7.1 Wireless Settings ............................................................................................ 47 4.7.2 WPS ................................................................................................................ 48 4.7.3 Wireless Security ............................................................................................ 51 4.7.4 Wireless MAC Filtering ................................................................................... 54 4.7.5 Wireless Advanced ......................................................................................... 56 4.7.6 Wireless Statistics ........................................................................................... 57 4.8 Guest Network ............................................................................................................ 58 4.8.1 Wireless Settings ............................................................................................ 58 4.9 DHCP .......................................................................................................................... 60 4.9.1 DHCP Settings ................................................................................................ 60 4.9.2 DHCP Clients List ........................................................................................... 61 4.9.3 Address Reservation ...................................................................................... 61 4.10 USB Settings ............................................................................................................... 63 4.10.1 Disk Settings ................................................................................................... 63 4.10.2 Folder Sharing ................................................................................................ 64 4.10.3 Print Server ..................................................................................................... 66 4.11 NAT ............................................................................................................................. 67 4.12 Forwarding .................................................................................................................. 67 4.12.1 Virtual Servers ................................................................................................ 67 4.12.2 Port Triggering ................................................................................................ 69 4.12.3 DMZ ................................................................................................................ 72 4.12.4 UPnP ............................................................................................................... 72 4.13 Security ....................................................................................................................... 73 4.13.1 Basic Security ................................................................................................. 73 4.13.2 Advanced Security .......................................................................................... 75 4.13.3 Local Management ......................................................................................... 76 4.13.4 Remote Management ..................................................................................... 77 4.14 Parental Control .......................................................................................................... 78 4.15 Access Control ............................................................................................................ 81 4.15.1 Rule ................................................................................................................. 81 4.15.2 Host ................................................................................................................. 87 4.15.3 Target .............................................................................................................. 88 4.15.4 Schedule ......................................................................................................... 90 4.16 Advanced Routing ...................................................................................................... 92 4.16.1 Static Routing List ........................................................................................... 92
- II -
4.16.2 System Routing Table ..................................................................................... 93 4.17 Bandwidth Control ...................................................................................................... 94 4.17.1 Control Settings .............................................................................................. 94 4.17.2 Rules List ........................................................................................................ 95 4.18 IP & MAC Binding ....................................................................................................... 96 4.18.1 Binding Settings .............................................................................................. 96 4.18.2 ARP List .......................................................................................................... 98 4.19 Dynamic DNS ............................................................................................................. 99 4.19.1 Comexe DDNS ............................................................................................... 99 4.19.2 Dyndns DDNS ............................................................................................... 100 4.19.3 No-IP DDNS .................................................................................................. 100 4.20 IPv6 Support ............................................................................................................. 101 4.20.1 IPv6 Status .................................................................................................... 102 4.20.2 IPv6 Setup .................................................................................................... 103 4.21 System Tools ............................................................................................................. 108 4.21.1 Time Settings ................................................................................................ 109 4.21.2 Diagnostic ..................................................................................................... 110 4.21.3 Firmware Upgrade ........................................................................................ 112 4.21.4 Factory Defaults ............................................................................................ 113 4.21.5 Backup & Restore ......................................................................................... 113 4.21.6 Reboot ........................................................................................................... 114 4.21.7 Password ...................................................................................................... 115 4.21.8 System Log ................................................................................................... 115 4.21.9 Statistics ........................................................................................................ 117 4.22 Logout ....................................................................................................................... 119 Appendix A: FAQ .................................................................................................. 120 Appendix B: Configuring the PC ......................................................................... 125 Appendix C: Specifications ................................................................................. 128 Appendix D: Glossary .......................................................................................... 129
- III -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Package Contents The following items should be found in your package:
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router DC Power Adapter for Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Ethernet Cable Quick Installation Guide Note:
Make sure that the package contains the above items. If any of the listed items are damaged or missing, please contact your distributor.
- 1 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Chapter 1. Introduction 1.1 Overview of the Router The Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router integrates 4-port Switch, Firewall, NAT-router and Wireless AP. Powered by 3x3 MIMO technology, the AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router delivers exceptional range and speed, which can fully meet the need of Small Office/Home Office (SOHO) networks and the users demanding higher networking performance. Your wireless connections are radio band selectable to avoid interference in your area, and the four built-in Gigabit ports supply high-speed connection to your wired devices. Incredible Speed The Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router provides up to 1750Mbps wireless connection with other wireless clients. The incredible speed makes it ideal for handling multiple data streams at the same time, which ensures your network stable and smooth. The performance of this 802.11ac wireless router will give you the unexpected networking experience at speed much faster than 802.11n. It is also compatible with all IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g products. Multiple Security Protections With multiple protection measures, including SSID broadcast control and wireless LAN 64/128/152-bit WEP encryption, Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2- PSK, WPA- PSK), as well as advanced Firewall protections, the Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router provides complete data privacy. Flexible Access Control The Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router provides flexible access control, so that parents or network administrators can establish restricted access policies for children or staff. It also supports Virtual Server and DMZ host for Port Triggering, and then the network administrators can manage and monitor the network in real time with the remote management function. Simple Installation Since the router is compatible with virtually all the major operating systems, it is very easy to manage. Quick Setup Wizard is supported and detailed instructions are provided step by step in this user guide. Before installing the router, please look through this guide to know all the routers functions.
- 2 -
1.2 Conventions Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router The router or Archer C7 mentioned in this guide stands for Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router without any explanation. 1.3 Main Features Complies with IEEE 802.11ac. One 10/100/1000M Auto-Negotiation RJ45 Internet port, four 10/100/1000M Auto-Negotiation RJ45 Ethernet ports, supporting Auto MDI/MDIX. Provides USB ports supporting storage/FTP/Media/Print Server. Provides WPA/WPA2, WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK authentication, TKIP/AES encryption security. Shares data and Internet access for users, supporting Dynamic IP/ Static IP/ PPPoE/ PPTP/
L2TP/ BigPond Internet access. Supports simultaneous 2.4GHz and 5GHz connections for 1750Mbps of total available bandwidth. Supports Virtual Server, Special Application and DMZ host. Supports UPnP, Dynamic DNS, Static Routing. Provides Automatic-connection and Scheduled Connection on certain time to the Internet. Built-in NAT and DHCP server supporting static IP address distributing. Supports Parental Control and Access Control. Connects Internet on demand and disconnects from the Internet when idle for PPPoE. Provides 64/128/152-bit WEP encryption security and wireless LAN ACL (Access Control List). Supports Flow Statistics. Supports IPv6. Supports firmware upgrade and Web management.
- 3 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1.4 Panel Layout 1.4.1 The Front Panel Figure 1-1 LEDs on the front panel The routers LEDs are located on the front panel (View from left to right). Name Status
(Power)
(System)
(Wireless 2.4GHz)
(Wireless 5GHz)
(Ethernet)
(Internet)
(WPS)
(USB on the rear panel) Indication Power is off. Power is on. The router is initializing or maybe has a system error. Off On On Flashing The router is working properly. The router has a system error. The wireless function is disabled. Off Off Flashing The wireless function is enabled. The router is working on 2.4GHz radio band. The wireless function is disabled. Off Flashing The wireless function is enabled. The router is working on 5GHz radio band. There is no device linked to the corresponding port. There is a device linked to the corresponding port but there is no activity. Off On On Slow Flashing Flashing There is an active device linked to the corresponding port. A wireless device is connecting to the network by WPS function. This process will last in the first 2 minutes. A wireless device has been successfully added to the network by WPS function. A wireless device failed to be added to the network by WPS function. No storage device or printer is plugged into the USB port. A storage device or printer has connected to the USB port. Table 1-1 The LEDs Description Quick Flashing Off On
- 4 -
Note:
1. After a device is successfully added to the network by WPS function, the WPS LED will keep Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router on for about 5 minutes and then turn off. 2. The router is set to working concurrently in 2.4GHz and 5GHz by default. If you desire to choose the working frequency, please go to 4.5 Dual Band Selection. 1.4.2 The Rear Panel Figure 1-2 Rear Panel sketch The following parts are located on the rear panel (View from left to right). Power: The Power socket is where you will connect the power adapter. Please use the power adapter provided with this Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router. On/Off: The switch for the power. Wireless On/Off: The switch for the wireless function. USB: The USB port connects to a USB storage device or a USB printer. Internet: This port is where you will connect the DSL/cable Modem, or Ethernet. Ethernet (1, 2, 3, 4): These ports (1, 2, 3, 4) connect the router to the local PC(s). WPS/Reset:
Pressing this button for less than 5 seconds enables the WPS function. If your client devices, such as wireless adapters, that support Wi-Fi Protected Setup, then you can press this button to quickly establish a connection between the router and client devices and automatically configure wireless security for your wireless network.
- 5 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Pressing this button for more than 5 seconds enables the Reset function. With the router powered on, press and hold the WPS/Reset button (approximately 8 seconds) until the SYS LED becomes quick-flash from slow-flash. And then release the button and wait the router to reboot to its factory default settings. Wireless antenna: To receive and transmit the wireless data.
- 6 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Chapter 2. Connecting the Router 2.1 System Requirements Broadband Internet Access Service (DSL/Cable/Ethernet) One DSL/Cable Modem that has an RJ45 connector (which is not necessary if the router is connected directly to the Ethernet) PCs with a working Ethernet Adapter and an Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors TCP/IP protocol on each PC Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox or Apple Safari 2.2 Installation Environment Requirements Place the router in a well-ventilated place far from any heater or heating vent Avoid direct irradiation of any strong light (such as sunlight) Keep at least 2 inches (5 cm) of clear space around the router Operating Temperature: 0~40 (32~104) Operating Humidity: 10%~90%RH, Non-condensing 2.3 Connecting the Router Before installing the router, make sure your PC is connected to the Internet through the broadband service successfully. If there is any problem, please contact your ISP. After that, please install the router according to the following steps. Don't forget to pull out the power plug and keep your hands dry. 1. Power off your modem (if the modem has a backup battery, please remove it too.), and disconnect your existing router if you have one. 2. Connect the Internet port on your Router to the Modems LAN port with an Ethernet cable. 3. Connect your computer to one of the Ethernet ports labeled 1~4 on the Router with an Ethernet cable. 4. Power on the modem and wait for 2 minutes. 5. Make sure the Wireless On/Off switch is On. Then plug the provided power adapter into the Power jack and the other end to a standard electrical wall socket. Press the On/Off button to
- 7 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router power on the Router. (Before you power on the Router, please make sure your computer is NOT connected to any other wireless network.) Figure 2-1 Hardware Installation Figure 2-2 USB Installation Note:
If you want to use the router to share files or printer, plug the USB storage device to the USB port or connect the printer to the router with a matching cable.
- 8 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Chapter 3. Quick Installation Guide This chapter will show you how to configure the basic functions of your AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router using Quick Setup Wizard within minutes. 3.1 TCP/IP Configuration The default IP address of the router is 192.168.0.1 and the default Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0. These values can be changed as you desire. In this guide, we use all the default values for description. Connect the local PC to the Ethernet ports of the router and then you can configure the IP address for your PC by the following method: Set up the TCP/IP Protocol in "Obtain an IP address automatically" mode on your PC. If you need instructions as to how to do this, please refer to Appendix B: Configuring the PC. Then the built-in DHCP server will assign IP address for the PC. Now, you can run the Ping command in the command prompt to verify the network connection between your PC and the router. The following example is in Windows XP OS. Open a command prompt, and type ping 192.168.0.1, and then press Enter. If the result displayed is similar to the Figure 3-1, it means the connection between your PC and the router has been established well. Figure 3-1 Success result of Ping command
- 9 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router If the result displayed is similar to Figure 3-2, it means the connection between your PC and the router failed. Figure 3-2 Failure result of Ping command Is the connection between your PC and the router correct?
Please check the connection following these steps:
1. Note:
The 1/2/3/4 LEDs of Ethernet ports which you link to on the router and LEDs on your PC's adapter should be lit. Is the TCP/IP configuration for your PC correct?
2. Note:
If the router's IP address is 192.168.0.1, your PC's IP address must be within the range of 192.168.0.2 ~ 192.168.0.254. Is the default LAN IP of the router correct?
3. Note:
If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192.168.0.x, the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.1.1 to avoid IP conflict. Therefore, in order to verify the network connection between your PC and the router, you can open a command prompt, and type ping 192.168.1.1, and then press Enter.
- 10 -
3.2 Quick Installation Guide Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router With a Web-based utility, it is easy to configure and manage the AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router. The Web-based utility can be used on any Windows, Macintosh or UNIX OS with a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox or Apple Safari. 1. To access the configuration utility, open a web-browser and type in the default IP address http://tplinkwifi.net in the address field. Figure 3-3 Log in the router After a moment, a login window will appear, similar to Figure 3-4. Enter admin for the User Name and Password, both in lower case letters. Then click the Login button or press the Enter key. Figure 3-4 Login Windows Note:
If the above screen does not pop up, it means that your Web-browser has been set to a proxy. Go to Tools menu>Internet Options>Connections>LAN Settings, in the screen that appears, cancel the Using Proxy checkbox, and click OK to finish it. 2. After successful login, the Quick Setup page will appear for you to quickly configure your router.
- 11 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 3-5 Quick Setup 3. Click Next, and then WAN Connection Type page will appear, shown in Figure 3-6. Figure 3-6 WAN Connection Type The router provides Auto-Detect function and supports five popular ways PPPoE, Dynamic IP, Static IP, L2TP and PPTP to connect to the Internet. Its recommended that you make use of the Auto-Detect function. If you are sure of what kind of connection type your ISP provides, you can select the very type and click Next to go on configuring. 4. If you select Auto-Detect, the router will automatically detect the connection type your ISP provides. Make sure the cable is securely plugged into the Internet port before detection. The appropriate configuration page will be displayed when an active Internet service is successfully detected by the router. 1) If the connection type detected is Dynamic IP, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-7. Please select to clone the MAC address or not, according to your situation.
- 12 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 3-7 Quick Setup MAC Clone 2) If the connection type detected is Static IP, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-8. Configure the following parameters and then click Next to continue. Figure 3-8 Quick Setup - Static IP IP Address - This is the WAN IP address as seen by external users on the Internet
(including your ISP). Your ISP will provide you with the IP address you need to enter here. Enter the IP address into the field. Subnet Mask - The Subnet Mask is used for the WAN IP address. Your IPS will provide you with the subnet mask which is usually 255.255.255.0. Default Gateway - Your ISP will provide you with the Gateway address which is the ISP servers address. Enter the gateway IP address into the box if required. Primary DNS - Enter the DNS Server IP address into the box if required. Secondary DNS - Optional If your ISP provides another DNS server, enter it into this field. 3) If the connection type detected is PPPoE/Russian PPPoE, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-9. Configure the following parameters and then click Next to continue.
- 13 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 3-9 Quick Setup PPPoE/Russia PPPoE User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. If you have difficulty with this process, please contact your ISP. Confirm Password - Enter the password again to make sure that the password is correct. Check the radio button of Dynamic/Static IP to activate the secondary connection if your ISP provides an extra Connection type such as Dynamic/Static IP to connect to a local area network. 4) If the connection type detected is L2TP/ Russian L2TP, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-10. Configure the following parameters and then click Next to continue. Figure 3-10 Quick Setup PPTP/Russia PPTP
- 14 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. If you have difficulty with this process, please contact your ISP. Select Static IP if IP Address/ Subnet Mask/ Gateway and DNS server address have been provided by your ISP. Then please enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP, and also enter the corresponding parameters. Select Dynamic IP if none of the above parameters are provided. Then you just need to enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP. 5) If the connection type detected is PPTP/Russian PPTP, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-11. Configure the following parameters and then click Next to continue. Figure 3-11 Quick Setup L2TP/Russia L2TP User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. If you have difficulty with this process, please contact your ISP. Select Static IP if IP Address/ Subnet Mask/ Gateway and DNS server address have been provided by your ISP. Then please enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP, and also enter the corresponding parameters.
- 15 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Select Dynamic IP if none of the above parameters are provided. Then you just need to enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP. 5. After finishing WAN Connection Type selection, the Dual Band Selection page will appear as shown in Figure 3-12. Here we take Concurrently with 2.4GHz and 5GHz (802.11a/b/g/n) for example. Click Next to continue. Figure 3-12 Quick Setup Dual Band Selection 2.4GHz - You can use the 2.4GHz band to connect to many classic wireless devices like gaming consoles, laptops, DVRs, ect. 5GHz - This band is less crowded and is used for time-sensitive music, video streaming or gaming. Using this band can avoid interference with 2.4GHz networks or noisy devices like cordless phones and microwave ovens. 6. Configure the basic parameters for 2.4GHz wireless network in the following screen as shown in Figure 3-13, and then click Next.
- 16 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 3-13 Quick Setup Wireless Wireless Radio - Indicates whether the wireless radio feature of the Router is enabled or disabled. Wireless Network Name - Enter a string of up to 32 characters. The same Name
(SSID) must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network. The default SSID is set to be TP-LINK_xxxx (xxxx indicates the last unique four characters of each Router's MAC address), which can ensure your wireless network security. But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name (SSID) to a different value. This value is case-sensitive. For example, MYSSID is NOT the same as MySsid. Wireless Security Disable Security - The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled. If disabled, the wireless stations will be able to connect the router without encryption. Enable Security (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK) - Its selected by default, with the default PSK password the same as the default PIN code. No Change - If you chose this option, wireless security configuration will not change!
The above settings are only for basic wireless parameters. For advanced settings, please check More Advanced Wireless Settings, and then you can set the following parameters.
- 17 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Band - This field displayed the operating frequency being configured. Mode - This field determines the wireless mode which the router works on. 11bg mixed - Select if you are using both 802.11b and 802.11g wireless clients. 11bgn mixed - Select if you are using a mix of 802.11b, 11g, and 11n wireless clients. Channel Width - Select any channel width from the drop-down list. The default setting is Auto, which can adjust the channel width for your clients automatically. Channel - This field determines which operating frequency will be used. It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point. If you select Auto, then the AP will select the best channel automatically. 7. Configure the basic parameters for 5GHz wireless network in the following screen as shown in Figure 3-14, and then click Next. Figure 3-14 Quick Setup Wireless Wireless Radio - Choose from the drop-down list to enable or disable the wireless radio.
- 18 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Wireless Network Name - Enter a string of up to 32 characters. The same Name
(SSID) must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network. The default SSID is set to be TP-LINK_xxxx_5G (xxxx indicates the last unique four characters of each Router's MAC address), which can ensure your wireless network security. But it is recommended strongly that you change your networks name (SSID) to a different value. This value is case-sensitive. For example, MYSSID is NOT the same as MySsid. Wireless Security Disable Security - The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled. If disabled, the wireless stations will be able to connect the router without encryption. Enable Security (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK) - Its selected by default, with the default PSK password the same as the default PIN code. No Change - If you chose this option, wireless security configuration will not change!
The above settings are only for basic wireless parameters. For advanced settings, please check More Advanced Wireless Settings, and then you can set the following parameters. Band - This field displayed the operating frequency being configured. Mode - This field determines the wireless mode which the router works on. 11an mixed - Select if you are using both 802.11a and 802.11n wireless clients. 11a/n/ac mixed Select if you are using 802.11a, 802.11n and 802.11ac wireless clients. Channel - This field determines which operating frequency will be used. It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point. If you select Auto, then the AP will select the best channel automatically. 8. Click the Finish button to complete the Quick Setup.
- 19 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 3-15 Quick Setup - Finish
- 20 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Chapter 4. Configuring the Router This chapter will show each Web page's key functions and the configuration way. 4.1 Login Figure 4-1 Login Windows Enter admin for the User Name and Password, both in lower case letters. Then click the Login button or press the Enter key. After your successful login, you will see the main menus on the left of the Web-based utility. On the right, there are the corresponding explanations and instructions. The detailed explanations for each Web pages key function are listed below. 4.2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the router. All information is read-only.
- 21 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-2 Status
- 22 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4.3 Quick Setup Please refer to 3.2 Quick Installation Guide. 4.4 Network Figure 4-3 the Network menu There are three submenus under the Network menu (shown in Figure 4-3): WAN, LAN, MAC Clone, and IPTV. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. 4.4.1 WAN Choose menu Network WAN, you can configure the IP parameters of the WAN on the screen below. 1. If your ISP provides the DHCP service, please choose Dynamic IP type, and the router will automatically get IP parameters from your ISP. You can see the page as follows (Figure 4-4):
Figure 4-4 WAN - Dynamic IP
- 23 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router This page displays the WAN IP parameters assigned dynamically by your ISP, including IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, etc. Click the Renew button to renew the IP parameters from your ISP. Click the Release button to release the IP parameters. MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes. It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP. Use These DNS Servers - If your ISP gives you one or two DNS addresses, select Use These DNS Servers and enter the primary and secondary addresses into the correct fields. Otherwise, the DNS servers will be assigned dynamically from your ISP. Note:
If you find error when you go to a website after entering the DNS addresses, it is likely that your DNS servers are set up improperly. You should contact your ISP to get DNS server addresses. Host Name - This option specifies the Host Name of the router. Get IP with Unicast DHCP - A few ISPs' DHCP servers do not support the broadcast applications. If you cannot get the IP Address normally, you can choose this option. (It is rarely required.) Click the Save button to save your settings. 2. If your ISP provides a static or fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS setting, select Static IP. The Static IP settings page will appear, shown in Figure 4-5. Figure 4-5 WAN - Static IP IP Address - Enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet Mask in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP, usually is 255.255.255.0.
- 24 -
Default Gateway - (Optional) Enter the gateway IP address in dotted-decimal notation Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router provided by your ISP. MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes. It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP. Primary/Secondary DNS - (Optional) Enter one or two DNS addresses in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Click the Save button to save your settings. 3. If your ISP provides a PPPoE connection, select PPPoE/Russia PPPoE option. And you should enter the following parameters (Figure 4-6):
Figure 4-6 WAN - PPPoE User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. Secondary Connection - Its available only for PPPoE Connection. If your ISP provides an extra Connection type such as Dynamic/Static IP to connect to a local area network, then you can check the radio button of Dynamic/Static IP to activate this secondary connection. Disabled - The Secondary Connection is disabled by default, so there is PPPoE connection only. This is recommended. Dynamic IP - You can check this radio button to use Dynamic IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP.
- 25 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Static IP - You can check this radio button to use Static IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP. Connect on Demand - In this mode, the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period (Max Idle Time) and be re-established when you attempt to access the Internet again. If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time, please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects. Connect Automatically - The connection can be re-established automatically when it was down. Time-based Connecting - The connection will only be established in the period from the start time to the end time (both are in HH:MM format). Note:
Only when you have configured the system time on System Tools Time Settings page, will the Time-based Connecting function can take effect. Connect Manually - You can configure the router to make it connect or disconnect manually. After a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time), the router will disconnect from your Internet connection, and you will not be able to re-establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. To use this option, check the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter "0" in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested. Click the Connect button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. Caution: Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background. If you want to do some advanced configurations, please click the Advanced button, and the page shown in Figure 4-7 will then appear:
- 26 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-7 PPPoE Advanced Settings MTU Size - The default MTU size is 1480 bytes, which is usually fine. It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP. Service Name/AC Name - The service name and AC (Access Concentrator) name should not be configured unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP. In most cases, leaving these fields blank will work. ISP Specified IP Address - If your ISP does not automatically assign IP addresses to the router during login, please click Use IP address specified by ISP check box and enter the IP address provided by your ISP in dotted-decimal notation. Detect Online Interval - The router will detect Access Concentrator online at every interval. The default value is 0. You can input the value between 0 and 120. The value 0 means no detect. Primary DNS/Secondary DNS - If your ISP does not automatically assign DNS addresses to the router during login, please click Use the following DNS servers check box and enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation of your ISPs primary DNS server. If a secondary DNS server address is available, enter it as well. Click the Save button to save your settings. 4. If your ISP provides BigPond Cable (or Heart Beat Signal) connection, please select BigPond Cable. And you should enter the following parameters (Figure 4-8):
- 27 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-8 WAN - BigPond Cable User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. Auth Server - Enter the authenticating server IP address or host name. Auth Domain - Type in the domain suffix server name based on your location. e.g. NSW / ACT - nsw.bigpond.net.au VIC / TAS / WA / SA / NT - vic.bigpond.net.au QLD - qld.bigpond.net.au MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes. It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP. Connect on Demand - In this mode, the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period (Max Idle Time) and be re-established when you attempt to access the Internet again. If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time, please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects. Connect Automatically - The connection can be re-established automatically when it was down. Connect Manually - You can configure the router to make it connect or disconnect manually. After a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time), the router will disconnect from your
- 28 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Internet connection, and you will not be able to re-establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. To use this option, check the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter "0" in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested. Click the Connect button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. Caution: Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background. Click the Save button to save your settings. 5. If your ISP provides L2TP connection, please select L2TP/Russia L2TP option. And you should enter the following parameters (Figure 4-9):
Figure 4-9 WAN - L2TP/Russia L2TP User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive.
- 29 -
Dynamic IP/ Static IP - Choose either as you are given by your ISP. Click the Connect Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. Connect on Demand - You can configure the router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time). If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity, Connect on Demand enables the router to automatically re-establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. If you wish to activate Connect on Demand, check the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates. Connect Automatically - Connect automatically after the router is disconnected. To use this option, check the radio button. Connect Manually - You can configure the router to make it connect or disconnect manually. After a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time), the router will disconnect from your Internet connection, and you will not be able to re-establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. To use this option, check the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter "0" in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested. Caution: Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time, because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background. Click the Save button to save your settings. 6. If your ISP provides PPTP connection, please select PPTP/Russia PPTP option. And you should enter the following parameters (Figure 4-10):
- 30 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-10 PPTP Settings User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. Dynamic IP/ Static IP - Choose either as you are given by your ISP and enter the ISPs IP address or the domain name. If you choose static IP and enter the domain name, you should also enter the DNS assigned by your ISP. And click the Save button. Click the Connect button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. Connect on Demand - You can configure the router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time). If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity, Connect on Demand enables the router to automatically re-establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. If you wish to activate Connect on Demand, check the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates.
- 31 -
Connect Automatically - Connect automatically after the router is disconnected. To use this Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router option, check the radio button. Connect Manually - You can configure the router to make it connect or disconnect manually. After a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time), the router will disconnect from your Internet connection, and you will not be able to re-establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. To use this option, click the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter "0" in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number in minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested. Caution: Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background. Click the Save button to save your settings. Note:
If you don't know how to choose the appropriate connection type, click the Detect button to allow the router to automatically search your Internet connection for servers and protocols. The connection type will be reported when an active Internet service is successfully detected by the router. This report is for your reference only. To make sure the connection type your ISP provides, please refer to the ISP. The various types of Internet connections that the router can detect are as follows:
PPPoE - Connections which use PPPoE that requires a user name and password. Dynamic IP - Connections which use dynamic IP address assignment. Static IP - Connections which use static IP address assignment. The router cannot detect PPTP/L2TP/Big Pond connections with your ISP. If your ISP uses one of these protocols, then you must configure your connection manually. LAN 4.4.2 Choose menu Network LAN, you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below. Figure 4-11 LAN
- 32 -
MAC Address - The physical address of the router, as seen from the LAN. The value can't Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router be changed. IP Address - Enter the IP address of your router or reset it in dotted-decimal notation
(factory default: 192.168.0.1). Subnet Mask - An address code that determines the size of the network. Normally use 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask. Note:
1) If you change the IP Address of LAN, you must use the new IP Address to log in the router. 2) If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet, the IP Address pool of the DHCP server will change accordingly at the same timewhile the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re-configured. 4.4.3 MAC Clone Choose menu Network MAC Clone, you can configure the MAC address of the WAN on the screen below, Figure 4-12:
Figure 4-12 MAC Address Clone Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter. Changes are rarely needed here. WAN MAC Address - This field displays the current MAC address of the Internet port. If your ISP requires you to register the MAC address, please enter the correct MAC address into this field in XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX format (X is any hexadecimal digit). Your PC's MAC Address - This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing the router. If the MAC address is required, you can click the Clone MAC Address button and this MAC address will fill in the WAN MAC Address field. Click Restore Factory MAC to restore the MAC address of Internet port to the factory default value. Click the Save button to save your settings. Note:
Only the PC on your LAN can use the MAC Address Clone function.
- 33 -
4.4.4 IPTV Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu Network IPTV, you can configure the IPTV function on the screen below, Figure 4-13Figure 4-12:
Figure 4-13 IPTV IGMP Proxy- If you want to watch TV through IGMP, please Enable it. Mode Automatic - There would be no change to the LAN ports, work with IGMP Proxy technology, allowing watch IPTV via wired and wireless connection. Bridge - Assign an individual LAN port for IPTV set-top-box, which can get IP address from ISP directly, without any quality loss even when PCs connect with router are downloading torrents at maximum speed, since this LAN port is isolated from other NAT LAN ports. 802.1Q Tag VLAN - ISP would provide the networking service based on 802.1Q Tag VLAN technology. You can assign different VLAN Tag ID for different LAN ports, to connect PC, IPTV set-top-box or IP-phone. Please contact with you ISP to get the VLAN ID information. 4.5 Dual Band Selection Choose menu Dual Band Selection, and you can choose the working frequency for your router. It is recommended that your computers and devices running video and voice applications use the 5GHz band, while your guest access and computers that are only browsing the web use the 2.4GHz band. Figure 4-14 Dual Band Selection
- 34 -
Concurrently with 2.4GHz and 5GHz (802.11a/b/g/n/ac) - Choose this option, and then Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router the router will work concurrently in 2.4GHz and 5GHz frequency. Only work in 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) - Choose this option, and then the router will only work in 2.4GHz frequency. You can use the 2.4GHz band to connect to many classic wireless devices like gaming consoles, laptops, DVRs, ect. Only work in 5GHz (802.11a/n/ac) - Choose this option, and then the router will only work in 5GHz frequency. This band is less crowded and is used for time-sensitive music, video streaming or gaming. Using this band can avoid interference with 2.4GHz networks or noisy devices like cordless phones and microwave ovens. 4.6 Wireless 2.4GHz Figure 4-15 Wireless menu There are six submenus under the Wireless menu (shown in Figure 4-15): Wireless Settings, WPS, Wireless Security, Wireless MAC Filtering, Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. Wireless Settings 4.6.1 Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless Settings, you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network of 2.4GHz on this page. Figure 4-16 Wireless Settings - 2.4GHz Wireless Network Name - Enter a value of up to 32 characters. The same Name (SSID) must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network.
- 35 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Note Dialog Mode - This field determines the wireless mode which the router works on. 11bg mixed - Select if you are using both 802.11b and 802.11g wireless clients. 11bgn mixed - Select if you are using a mix of 802.11b, 11g, and 11n wireless clients. It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 802.11bgn mixed, and all of 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n wireless stations can connect to the router. Channel Width - Select the channel width from the drop-down list. The default setting is automatic, which can adjust the channel width for your clients automatically. Note:
If 11bg mixed is selected in the Mode field, the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M, which is unable to be changed. Channel - This field determines which operating frequency will be used. The default channel is set to Auto, so the AP will choose the best channel automatically. It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point. Enable SSID Broadcast - When wireless clients survey the local area for wireless networks to associate with, they will detect the SSID broadcast by the router. If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox, the Wireless router will broadcast its name (SSID) on the air. Enable WDS Bridging - Check this box to enable WDS. With this function, the router can bridge two or more WLANs. If this checkbox is selected, you will have to set the following parameters as shown in Figure 4-17. Make sure the following settings are correct. Figure 4-17 WDS Setting SSID (to be bridged) - The SSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client. You can also use the search function to select the SSID to join. MAC Address (to be bridged) - The BSSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client. You can also use the search function to select the BSSID to join. Survey - Click this button, you can search the AP which runs in the current channel.
- 36 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Key type - This option should be chosen according to the AP's security configuration. It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP's security type WEP Index - This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP(ASCII) or WEP(HEX). It indicates the index of the WEP key. Auth Type - This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP(ASCII) or WEP(HEX). It indicates the authorization type of the Root AP. Password - If the AP your router is going to connect needs password, you need to fill the password in this blank. 4.6.2 WPS Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz WPS, you can the screen as shown in Figure 4-18. This section will guide you to add a new wireless device to an existing network quickly by WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) function. Figure 4-18 WPS WPS Status - Enable or disable the WPS function here. Current PIN - The current value of the router's PIN is displayed here. The default PIN of the router can be found in the label or User Guide. Restore PIN - Restore the PIN of the router to its default. Gen New PIN - Click this button, and then you can get a new random value for the router's PIN. You can ensure the network security by generating a new PIN. Disable Routers PIN - If this box is checked, and then wireless clients will not be able to connect to the wireless network with PIN code. Add device - You can add a new device to the existing network manually by clicking this button. If the wireless adapter supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can establish a wireless connection between wireless adapter and router using either Push Button Configuration (PBC) method or PIN method. Note:
- 37 -
To build a successful connection by WPS, you should also do the corresponding configuration of the new device for WPS function meanwhile. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router I. Use the Wi-Fi Protected Setup Button Use this method if your client device has a WPS button. Step 1: Press the WPS/Reset button on the back panel of the router, as shown in Figure 4-19. You can also keep the default WPS status as Enabled and click the Add device button in Figure 4-18. Then choose Press the button of the new device in two minutes and click Connect, shown in Figure 4-20. Figure 4-19 Step 2: Press and hold the WPS button of the client device. Figure 4-20 Add A New Device Step 3: The Wi-Fi Protected Setup LED flashes for two minutes during the Wi-Fi Protected Setup process. Step 4: When the WPS LED is on, the client device has successfully connected to the router. II. Enter the client devices PIN on the router Use this method if your client device does not have the WPS button, but has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN number. Step 1: Keep the default WPS status as Enabled and click the Add device button in Figure 4-18, then Figure 4-21 will appear.
- 38 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-21 Add A New Device Step 2: Enter the PIN number from the client device in the field on the WPS screen above. Then click Connect button. Step 3: Connect successfully will appear on the screen of Figure 4-21, which means the client device has successfully connected to the router. III. Enter the routers PIN on your client device Use this method if your client device asks for the routers PIN number. Step 1: On the client device, enter the PIN number listed on the routers Wi-Fi Protected Setup screen, shown in Figure 4-18 (It is also labeled on the bottom of the router). Step 2: The Wi-Fi Protected Setup LED flashes for two minutes during the Wi-Fi Protected Setup process. Step 3: When the WPS LED is on, the client device has successfully connected to the router. Note:
1) The WPS LED on the router will light green for five minutes if the device has been successfully added to the network. 2) The WPS function cannot be configured if the Wireless Function of the router is disabled. Please make sure the Wireless Function is enabled before configuring the WPS. Wireless Security 4.6.3 Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless Security, you can configure the security settings of your wireless network. There are five wireless security modes supported by the router:
WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, and WEP.
- 39 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-22 Wireless Security Disable Security - If you do not want to use wireless security, check this radio button. But its strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security. WPA/WPA2-Personal - Its the WPA/WPA2 authentication type based on pre-shared passphrase. The router is configured by this security type by default. Version - you can choose the version of the WPA-PSK security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select WPA-PSK (Pre-shared key of WPA) or WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared key of WPA2) automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. Encryption - When WPA-PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type, you can select either Automatic, or TKIP or AES as Encryption. Note:
If you check the WPA/WPA2-Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption, you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4-23.
- 40 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-23 WPA/WPA2 - Personal PSK Password - You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 characters or 8 to 64 Hexadecimal characters. The default password is the same with the default PIN code, which is labeled on the bottom of the router or can be found in Figure 4-18. Group Key Update Period - Specify the group key update interval in seconds. The value should be 30 or above. Enter 0 to disable the update. WPA/WPA2- Enterprise - Its based on Radius Server. Version - you can choose the version of the WPA security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) or WPA2
(WPA version 2) automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. Encryption - You can select either Automatic, or TKIP or AES. Note:
If you check the WPA/WPA2-Enterprise radio button and choose TKIP encryption, you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4-24. Figure 4-24 WPA/WPA2 - Enterprise Radius Server IP - Enter the IP address of the Radius server. Radius Port - Enter the port number of the Radius server. Radius Password - Enter the password for the Radius server. Group Key Update Period - Specify the group key update interval in seconds. The value should be 30 or above. Enter 0 to disable the update. WEP - It is based on the IEEE 802.11 standard. If you check this radio button, you will find a notice in red as show in Figure 4-25.
- 41 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-25 WEP Type - you can choose the type for the WEP security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. WEP Key Format - Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here. Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits (0-9, a-f, A-F) in the specified length. ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length. WEP Key - Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create. Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network. Key Type - You can select the WEP key length (64-bit, or 128-bit, or 152-bit.) for encryption. "Disabled" means this WEP key entry is invalid. 64-bit - You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, and null key is not permitted) or 5 ASCII characters. 128-bit - You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, and null key is not permitted) or 13 ASCII characters. 152-bit - You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, and null key is not permitted) or 16 ASCII characters. Note:
If you do not set the key, the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type. Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page. 4.6.4 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless MAC Filtering, you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function, shown in Figure 4-26.
- 42 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-26 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address, click Enable. The default setting is Disabled. MAC Address - The wireless station's MAC address that you want to filter. Status - The status of this entry, either Enabled or Disabled. Description - A simple description of the wireless station. To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry, click the Add New button. The "Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry" page will appear, shown in Figure 4-27:
Figure 4-27 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field. The format of the MAC is any hexadecimal digit). For example:
is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
(X Address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B. 2. Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field. For example:
Wireless station A. 3. Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop-down list. 4. Click the Save button to save this entry.
- 43 -
To modify an existing entry:
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1. Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify. 2. Modify the information. 3. Click the Save button. Click the Delete in the entry you want to delete to delete an existing entry. Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. Click the Next button to go to the next page. Click the Previous button to return to the previous page. For example: If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00-0A-EB-00-07-5F are able to access the router, but all the other wireless stations cannot access the router, you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps:
1. Click the Enable button to enable this function. 2. Select the radio button Allow the entries specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules. 3. Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already. 4. Click the Add New... button. 1) Enter the MAC address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B/00-0A-EB-00-07-5F in the MAC Address field. 2) Enter wireless station A/B in the Description field. 3) Select Enabled in the Status drop-down list. 4) Click the Save button. 5) Click the Back button. The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list:
- 44 -
4.6.5 Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless Advanced, you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network. Figure 4-28 Wireless Advanced Transmit Power - Here you can specify the transmit power of router. You can select High, Middle or Low which you would like. High is the default setting and is recommended. Beacon Interval - Enter a value between 20-1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here. The beacons are the packets sent by the router to synchronize a wireless network. Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons. The default value is 100. RTS Threshold - Here you can specify the RTS (Request to Send) Threshold. If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size, the router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame. The default value is 2346. Fragmentation Threshold - This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented. Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets. 2346 is recommended. the default setting and is DTIM Interval - This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message
(DTIM). A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages. When the router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients, it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value. You can specify the value between 1-15 Beacon Intervals. The default value is 1, which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval. Enable WMM - WMM function can guarantee the packets with high-priority messages being transmitted preferentially. It is strongly recommended.
- 45 -
Enable Short GI - This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router reducing the guard interval time. Enabled AP Isolation - This function can isolate wireless stations on your network from each other. Wireless devices will be able to communicate with the router but not with each other. To use this function, check this box. AP Isolation is disabled by default. Note:
If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page, it's strongly recommended to keep the provided default values; otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance. 4.6.6 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless Statistics, you can see the MAC Address, Current Status, Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station. MAC Address - The connected wireless station's MAC address Figure 4-29 Wireless Statistics Current Status - The connected wireless station's running status, one of STA-AUTH/
STA-ASSOC/ STA-JOINED/ WPA/ WPA-PSK/ WPA2/ WPA2-PSK/ AP-UP/ AP-DOWN/
Disconnected Received Packets - Packets received by the station Sent Packets - Packets sent by the station You cannot change any of the values on this page. To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations, click on the Refresh button. If the numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page, click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page. Note:
This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds.
- 46 -
4.7 Wireless 5GHz Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-30 Wireless menu There are six submenus under the Wireless menu (shown in Figure 4-15): Wireless Settings, WPS, Wireless Security, Wireless MAC Filtering, Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.7.1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless 5GHz Wireless Settings, you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network of 5GHz on this page. Figure 4-31 Wireless Settings - 5GHz Wireless Network Name - Enter a value of up to 32 characters. The same Name (SSID) must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network. Mode - Select the desired mode. 11an mixed - Select if you are using both 802.11a and 802.11n wireless clients. It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode 11an mixed, and all of 802.11a and 802.11n wireless stations can connect to the router. 11a/n/ac mixed - Select if you are using a mix of 802.11a, 11n, and 11ac wireless clients. It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 802.11a/n/ac mixed, and all of 802.11a, 802.11n, and 802.11ac wireless stations can connect to the router.
- 47 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Channel - This field determines which operating frequency will be used. The default channel is set to Auto, so the router will choose the best channel automatically. It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point. Enable SSID Broadcast - When wireless clients survey the local area for wireless networks to associate with, they will detect the SSID broadcast by the router. If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox, the Wireless router will broadcast its name (SSID) on the air. Enable WDS Bridging - Check this box to enable WDS. With this function, the router can bridge two or more WLANs. If this checkbox is selected, you will have to set the following parameters as shown in Figure 4-32. Make sure the following settings are correct. Figure 4-32 SSID (to be bridged) - The SSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client. You can also use the search function to select the SSID to join. MAC Address (to be bridged) - The BSSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client. You can also use the search function to select the BSSID to join. Survey - Click this button, you can search the AP which runs in the current channel. Key type - This option should be chosen according to the AP's security configuration. It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP's security type WEP Index - This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP(ASCII) or WEP(HEX).It indicates the index of the WEP key. Auth Type - This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP(ASCII) or WEP(HEX).It indicates the authorization type of the Root AP. Password - If the AP your router is going to connect needs password, you need to fill the password in this blank. 4.7.2 WPS Choose menu Wireless 5GHz WPS, you can the screen as shown in Figure 4-33. This section will guide you to add a new wireless device to an existing network quickly by WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) function.
- 48 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WPS Status - Enable or disable the WPS function here. Figure 4-33 WPS Current PIN - The current value of the router's PIN is displayed here. The default PIN of the router can be found in the label or User Guide. Restore PIN - Restore the PIN of the router to its default. Gen New PIN - Click this button, and then you can get a new random value for the router's PIN. You can ensure the network security by generating a new PIN. Add device - You can add a new device to the existing network manually by clicking this button. If the wireless adapter supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can establish a wireless connection between wireless adapter and router using either Push Button Configuration (PBC) method or PIN method. Note:
To build a successful connection by WPS, you should also do the corresponding configuration of the new device for WPS function meanwhile. I. Use the Wi-Fi Protected Setup Button Use this method if your client device has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup button. Step 1: Press the WPS/Reset button on the back panel of the router, as shown in Figure 4-34. You can also keep the default WPS status as Enabled and click the Add device button in Figure 4-33. Then choose Press the button of the new device in two minutes and click Connect, shown in Figure 4-35. Figure 4-34
- 49 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-35 Add A New Device Step 2: Press and hold the WPS button of the client device directly. Step 3: The Wi-Fi Protected Setup LED flashes for two minutes during the Wi-Fi Protected Setup process. Step 4: When the WPS LED is on, the client device has successfully connected to the router. II. Enter the client devices PIN on the router Use this method if your client device does not have the WPS button, but has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN number. Step 1: Keep the default WPS status as Enabled and click the Add device button in Figure 4-33, then Figure 4-36 will appear. Figure 4-36 Add A New Device Step 2: Enter the PIN number from the client device in the field on the above WPS screen. Then click Connect button. Step 3: Connect successfully will appear on the screen of Figure 4-36, which means the client device has successfully connected to the router. III. Enter the routers PIN on your client device Use this method if your client device asks for the routers PIN number. Step 1: On the client device, enter the PIN number listed on the routers Wi-Fi Protected Setup screen, shown in Figure 4-33 (It is also labeled on the bottom of the router). Step 2: The Wi-Fi Protected Setup LED flashes for two minutes during the Wi-Fi Protected Setup process. Step 3: When the WPS LED is on, the client device has successfully connected to the router.
- 50 -
Note:
1) The WPS LED on the router will light green for five minutes if the device has been Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router successfully added to the network. 2) The WPS function cannot be configured if the Wireless Function of the router is disabled. Please make sure the Wireless Function is enabled before configuring the WPS. 4.7.3 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless 5GHz Wireless Security, you can configure the security settings of your wireless network. There are five wireless security modes supported by the router: WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, and WEP. Figure 4-37 Wireless Security Disable Security - If you do not want to use wireless security, check this radio button. But its strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security. WPA/WPA2-Personal - Its the WPA/WPA2 authentication type based on pre-shared passphrase. The router is configured by this security type by default.
- 51 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Version - you can choose the version of the WPA-PSK security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select WPA-PSK (Pre-shared key of WPA) or WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared key of WPA2) automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. Encryption - When WPA-PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type, you can select either Automatic, or TKIP or AES as Encryption. Note:
If you check the WPA/WPA2-Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption, you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4-38. Figure 4-38 WPA/WPA2 - Personal PSK Password - You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 characters or 8 to 64 Hexadecimal characters. The default password is the same with the default PIN code, which is labeled on the bottom of the router or can be found in Figure 4-33. Group Key Update Period - Specify the group key update interval in seconds. The value should be 30 or above. Enter 0 to disable the update. WPA /WPA2- Enterprise - Its based on Radius Server. Version - you can choose the version of the WPA security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) or WPA2
(WPA version 2) automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. Encryption - You can select either Automatic, or TKIP or AES. Note:
If you check the WPA/WPA2-Enterprise radio button and choose TKIP encryption, you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4-39.
- 52 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-39 WPA/WPA2 - Enterprise Radius Server IP - Enter the IP address of the Radius server. Radius Port - Enter the port number of the Radius server. Radius Password - Enter the password for the Radius server. Group Key Update Period - Specify the group key update interval in seconds. The value should be 30 or above. Enter 0 to disable the update. WEP - It is based on the IEEE 802.11 standard. If you check this radio button, you will find a notice in red as show in Figure 4-40. Figure 4-40 WEP Type - you can choose the type for the WEP security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. WEP Key Format - Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here. Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits (0-9, a-f, A-F) in the specified length. ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length. WEP Key - Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create. Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network. Key Type - You can select the WEP key length (64-bit, or 128-bit, or 152-bit.) for encryption. "Disabled" means this WEP key entry is invalid.
- 53 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 64-bit - You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, and null key is not permitted) or 5 ASCII characters. 128-bit - You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, and null key is not permitted) or 13 ASCII characters. 152-bit - You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, and null key is not permitted) or 16 ASCII characters. Note:
If you do not set the key, the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type. Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page. 4.7.4 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless 5GHz MAC Filtering, you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function, shown in Figure 4-41. Figure 4-41 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address, click Enable. The default setting is Disabled. MAC Address - The wireless station's MAC address that you want to filter. Status - The status of this entry, either Enabled or Disabled. Description - A simple description of the wireless station. To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry, click the Add New button. The "Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry" page will appear, shown in Figure 4-42:
- 54 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-42 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field. The format of the MAC is any hexadecimal digit). For example:
is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
(X Address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B. 2. Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field. For example:
Wireless station A. 3. Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop-down list. 4. Click the Save button to save this entry. To modify an existing entry:
1. Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify. 2. Modify the information. 3. Click the Save button. Click the Delete in the entry you want to delete to delete an existing entry. Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. Click the Next button to go to the next page. Click the Previous button to return to the previous page. For example: If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00-0A-EB-00-07-5F are able to access the router, but all the other wireless stations cannot access the router, you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps:
1. Click the Enable button to enable this function. 2. Select the radio button Allow the entries specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules. 3. Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already.
- 55 -
4. Click the Add New... button. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 5. Enter the MAC address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B/00-0A-EB-00-07-5F in the MAC Address field. 6. Enter wireless station A/B in the Description field. 7. Select Enabled in the Status drop-down list. 8. Click the Save button. 9. Click the Back button. The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list:
4.7.5 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless 5GHz Wireless Advanced, you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network. Figure 4-43 Wireless Advanced Transmit Power - Here you can specify the transmit power of router. You can select High, Middle or Low which you would like. High is the default setting and is recommended. Beacon Interval - Enter a value between 20-1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here. The beacons are the packets sent by the router to synchronize a wireless network. Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons. The default value is 100. RTS Threshold - Here you can specify the RTS (Request to Send) Threshold. If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size, the router will send RTS frames to a
- 56 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame. The default value is 2346. Fragmentation Threshold - This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented. Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets. 2346 is recommended. the default setting and is DTIM Interval - This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message
(DTIM). A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages. When the router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients, it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value. You can specify the value between 1-15 Beacon Intervals. The default value is 1, which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval. Enable WMM - WMM function can guarantee the packets with high-priority messages being transmitted preferentially. It is strongly recommended. Enable Short GI - This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time. Enabled AP Isolation - This function can isolate wireless stations on your network from each other. Wireless devices will be able to communicate with the router but not with each other. To use this function, check this box. AP Isolation is disabled by default. Note:
If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page, it's strongly recommended to keep the provided default values; otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance. 4.7.6 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless 5GHz Wireless Statistics, you can see the MAC Address, Current Status, Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station. Figure 4-44 Wireless Statistics MAC Address - The connected wireless station's MAC address Current Status - The connected wireless station's running status, one of STA-AUTH/
STA-ASSOC/ STA-JOINED/ WPA/ WPA-PSK/ WPA2/ WPA2-PSK/ AP-UP/ AP-DOWN/
Disconnected
- 57 -
Received Packets - Packets received by the station Sent Packets - Packets sent by the station Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router You cannot change any of the values on this page. To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations, click on the Refresh button. If the numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page, click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page. Note:
This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds. 4.8 Guest Network Figure 4-45 The Guest Network menu There are one submenus under the Guest Network menu (shown in Figure 4-45): Wireless Settings. 4.8.1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Guest Network Wireless Settings, you can configure the Guest Network Wireless Settings on the page as shown in Figure 4-46.
- 58 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-46 Guest Network Wireless Settings Allow Guest To Access My Local Network - If enabled, guests can communicate with hosts. Enable Guest Network Bandwidth Control - If enabled, the Guest Network Bandwidth Control rules will take effect. Egress Bandwidth For Guest Network - The upload speed through the WAN port for Guest Network. Ingress Bandwidth For Guest Network - The download speed through the WAN port for Guest Network. Guest Network (2.4G/5G) - Click to enable or disable the Guest Network function here. Network Name - Enter a value of up to 32 characters. The same Name (SSID) must be assigned to all wireless devices in your Guest Network. Wireless Security - You can configure the security of Guest Network here. Access Time - During this time the wireless stations could accessing the AP. Note:
The range of bandwidth for Guest Network is calculated according to the setting of Bandwidth Control on the page Bandwidth Control->Control Settings.
- 59 -
4.9 DHCP Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-47 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu (shown in Figure 4-47): DHCP Settings, DHCP Clients List and Address Reservation. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.9.1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings, you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 4-48.The router is set up by default as a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server, which provides the TCP/IP configuration for all the PC(s) that are connected to the router on the LAN. Figure 4-48 DHCP Settings DHCP Server - Enable or Disable the DHCP server. If you disable the Server, you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually. Start IP Address - Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses. 192.168.0.100 is the default start address. End IP Address - Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses. 192.168.0.199 is the default end address. Address Lease Time - The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the router with their current dynamic IP Address. Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be "leased" this dynamic IP Address. After the time is up,
- 60 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address. The range of the time is 1
~ 2880 minutes. The default value is 120 minutes. Default Gateway - (optional.) It is suggested to input the IP address of the Ethernet port of the router. The default value is 192.168.0.1. Default Domain - (optional) Input the domain name of your network. Primary DNS - (optional) Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP. Secondary DNS - (optional) Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers. Note:
To use the DHCP server function of the router, you must configure all computers on the LAN as
"Obtain an IP Address automatically". 4.9.2 DHCP Clients List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Clients List, you can view the information about the clients attached to the router in the screen as shown in Figure 4-49. Figure 4-49 DHCP Clients List Client Name - The name of the DHCP client MAC Address - The MAC address of the DHCP client Assigned IP - The IP address that the router has allocated to the DHCP client Lease Time - The time of the DHCP client leased. After the dynamic IP address has expired, a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user. You cannot change any of the values on this page. To update this page and to show the current attached devices, click the Refresh button. 4.9.3 Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation, you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen (shown in Figure 4-50). When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN, that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server. Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings.
- 61 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-50 Address Reservation MAC Address - The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address. Reserved IP Address - The IP address reserved for the PC by the router. Status - The status of this entry, either Enabled or Disabled. To Reserve an IP address:
1. Click the Add New button. Then Figure 4-51 will pop up. 2. Enter the MAC address (in XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX format.) and IP address (in dotted-decimal notation) of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address. 3. Click the Save button. Figure 4-51 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify an existing entry:
1. Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify. 2. Modify the information. 3. Click the Save button. Click the Delete in the entry you want to delete to delete an existing entry. Click the Enable/Disable All button to make all entries enabled/disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page.
- 62 -
4.10 USB Settings Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-52 The USB Settings menu There are five submenus under the USB Settings menu (shown in Figure 4-52):Disk Settings, Folder Sharing, and Print Server. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.10.1 Disk Settings Choose menu USB SettingsDisk Settings, you can configure the USB drive connected to the Router, and view the Device Settings like ID, Volume, Capacity, Free Space and Sharing Status. Figure 4-53 Disk Setting Volume - The volume name of the storage drive. Volume 1-8 is mapped to USB Port 1, Volume 9-16 is mapped to USB Port 2. Capacity - The storage capacity of the USB driver. Free - The available space of the USB driver. Active - Indicates the sharing status of each storage volume. Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server:
1. Plug the external hard drive or USB flash drive into the router. 2. Click Scan to find the connected drive. 3. Click Safely Remove to eject the connected drive. 4. Check the Active box to enable file sharing. 5. Uncheck the Active box to disable file sharing.
- 63 -
4.10.2 Folder Sharing Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu USB SettingsFolder Sharing, you can create an FTP server that can be accessed from the Internet or your local network. Figure 4-54 FTP Server Configuration Sharing Account Use Login Account - You can use the login account or create a new one. The username and the password are the same as that of the login account. When choosing Use Login Account as shared account, the text boxes below cannot be edited. Use Following Account - You can create a new username and password. Username - Type the username that you want to give access to the USB drive. The username must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length. Password - Enter the password in the Password field. The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length. For security purposes, the password for each user account is not displayed. Confirm Password - Re-enter the password here. Sharing Settings Network/Media Server Name - Name of the USB drive connected to the router. Please note that the network connection is enabled by default. Enable - The Access Method is active if the Enable box is selected.
- 64 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Access Method - Available methods to access the storage device. 1) Network Neighborhood: This method is enabled by default. To access the USB drive for example from a Windows computer:
i. Select Start > Run. ii. Enter \\192.168.0.1 in the dialog box and click the OK button. 2) FTP: This method is disabled by default. If you select this check box and click the Save button, the LAN users can access the USB drive through FTP. To access the USB drive for example from a Windows computer:
i. Select Start > Run. ii. Enter ftp://192.168.0.1:21 in the dialog box and click the OK button. 3) FTP (Remote): This method is disabled by default. If you select this check box, remote users can access the USB drive through FTP over the Internet. This feature supports both downloading and uploading of files. To access the USB drive for example from a Windows computer:
i. Select Start > Run. ii. Enter ftp://WAN IP:port in the dialog box and click the OK button. Note:
If the port for FTP (Remote) is changed, the port for FTP will be changed to the same port. Sharing Mode 1) 2) If Sharing All is selected, all the folders in the USB drive will be shared. Besides Authentication will appear for you to choose or not. If Sharing Folders is selected, only the folders you specified will be shared. You have to click the Create Share Folder to specify folders allowed to be shared in the next screen.
- 65 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-55 Add or Modify Share Folder Allow Guest Network Access - Select the check box to allow the Guest Network to have access to the shared folder. Enable Authentication - Select the check box to require users to log in with a username and password. You can create a new login in the Advanced USB Settings page. Otherwise, the username and password will be the same as your Web Management login information. Enable Write Access - Select the check box to allow users to make changes to the folder content. Enable Media Sharing - Select this checkbox to enable media sharing. To specify your sharing folders:
i. Select the volume where you would like to create your sharing folder. ii. Create a share name, e.g. Movie. iii. Select to enable the corresponding function(s) as you desire. iv. Click the Save button. 4.10.3 Print Server Choose menu USB SettingsPrint Server, you can configure print server on this page as shown below. Figure 4-56 Pint Server Setting
- 66 -
There are two states of the print server, as follows. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Online - Indicates the print service has been turned on, and no user is using the print service at present. You can click the "Stop" button to stop the print service. Offline - Indicates the print service feature is disabled. You can click "Start" button to start the print service. 4.11 NAT Choose NAT, and you can enable or disable the NAT and Hardware NAT Control feature. The NAT Rules and Hardware NAT will work properly only when the NAT Control feature is enabled. Figure 4-57 The Forwarding menu Current NAT Status - If enabled, the NAT function and the Forwarding configuration will take effect. If disabled, neither NAT function nor Forwarding configuration will take effect. Current Hardware NAT Status - If enabled, the Hardware NAT feature will take effect. If disabled, neither Hardware NAT feature will take effect. 4.12 Forwarding Figure 4-58 The Forwarding menu There are four submenus under the Forwarding menu (shown in Figure 4-58): Virtual Servers, Port Triggering, DMZ and UPnP. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. 4.12.1 Virtual Servers Choose menu ForwardingVirtual Servers, and then you can view and add virtual servers in the next screen (shown in Figure 4-59). Virtual servers can be used for setting up public services
- 67 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router on your LAN. A virtual server is defined as a service port, and all requests from Internet to this service port will be redirected to the computer specified by the server IP. Any PC that was used for a virtual server must have a static or reserved IP address because its IP address may change when using the DHCP function. If you want the Virtual Servers configuration take effect, please make sure the NAT is enabled. Figure 4-59 Virtual Servers Service Port - The numbers of External Service Ports. You can enter a service port or a range of service ports (the format is XXX YYY; XXX is the Start port and YYY is the End port). Internal Port - The Internal Service Port number of the PC running the service application. You can leave it blank if the Internal Port is the same as the Service Port, or enter a specific port number when Service Port is a single one. IP Address - The IP address of the PC running the service application. Protocol - The protocol used for this application, either TCP, UDP, or All (all protocols supported by the router). Status - The status of this entry, "Enabled" means the virtual server entry is enabled. Common Service Port - Some common services already exist in the drop-down list. Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. To setup a virtual server entry:
1. Click the Add New... button. (pop-up Figure 4-60) 2. Select the service you want to use from the Common Service Port list. If the Common Service Port menu does not list the service that you want to use, enter the number of the service port or service port range in the Service Port field. 3. Enter the IP address of the computer running the service application in the IP Address field. 4. Select the protocol used for this application in the Protocol drop-down list, either TCP, UDP, or All. 5. Select the Enabled option in the Status drop-down list.
- 68 -
6. Click the Save button. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-60 Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Note:
It is possible that you have a computer or server that has more than one type of available service. If so, select another service, and type the same IP address for that computer or server. To modify an existing entry:
1. Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify. 2. Modify the information. 3. Click the Save button. Click the Delete in the entry you want to delete to delete an existing entry. Click the Enable/ Disable All button to make all entries enabled/ disabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. Click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return to the previous page. Note:
If you set the service port of the virtual server as 80, you must set the Web management port on Security Remote Management page to be any other value except 80 such as 8080. Otherwise there will be a conflict to disable the virtual server. 4.12.2 Port Triggering Choose menu ForwardingPort Triggering, you can view and add port triggering in the next screen (shown in Figure 4-61). Some applications require multiple connections, like Internet games, video conferencing, Internet telephoning and so on. Port Triggering is used for some of these applications that cannot work with a pure NAT router.
- 69 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-61 Port Triggering To add a new rule, follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New button, the next screen will pop-up as shown in Figure 4-62. 2. Select a common application from the Common Applications drop-down list, then the Trigger Port field and the Incoming Ports field will be automatically filled. If the Common Applications do not have the application you need, enter the Trigger Port and the Incoming Ports manually. 3. Select the protocol used for Trigger Port from the Trigger Protocol drop-down list, either TCP, UDP, or All. 4. Select the protocol used for Incoming Ports from the Incoming Protocol drop-down list, either TCP or UDP, or All. 5. Select Enabled in Status field. 6. Click the Save button to save the new rule. Figure 4-62 Add or Modify a Triggering Entry Trigger Port - The port for outgoing traffic. An outgoing connection using this port will trigger this rule. Trigger Protocol - The protocol used for Trigger Ports, either TCP, UDP, or All (all protocols supported by the router).
- 70 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Incoming Port - The port or port range used by the remote system when it responds to the outgoing request. A response using one of these ports will be forwarded to the PC which triggered this rule. You can input at most 5 groups of ports (or port sections). Every group of ports must be separated with ",", for example, 2000-2038, 2046, 2050-2051, 2085, 3010-3030. Incoming Protocol - The protocol used for Incoming Port, either TCP, UDP, or ALL (all protocols supported by the router). Status - The status of this entry, Enabled means the Port Triggering entry is enabled. Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. Common Applications - Some popular applications already listed in the drop-down list of Incoming Protocol. To modify an existing entry:
1. Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify. 2. Modify the information. 3. Click the Save button. Click the Delete in the entry you want to delete to delete an existing entry. Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled. Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Once the router is configured, the operation is as follows:
1. A local host makes an outgoing connection to an external host using a destination port number defined in the Trigger Port field. 2. The router records this connection, opens the incoming port or ports associated with this entry in the Port Triggering table, and associates them with the local host. 3. When necessary, the external host will be able to connect to the local host using one of the ports defined in the Incoming Ports field. Note:
1. When the trigger connection is released, the corresponding opened ports will be closed. 2. Each rule can only be used by one host on the LAN at a time. The trigger connection of other hosts on the LAN will be refused. Incoming Ports ranges cannot overlap each other. 3.
- 71 -
4.12.3 DMZ Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu ForwardingDMZ, and then you can view and configure DMZ host in the screen
(shown in Figure 4-63).The DMZ host feature allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special-purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing. The router forwards packets of all services to the DMZ host. Any PC whose port is being forwarded must have its DHCP client function disabled and should have a new static IP Address assigned to it because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function. Figure 4-63 DMZ To assign a computer or server to be a DMZ server:
1. Click the Enable button. 2. Enter the IP address of a local PC that is set to be DMZ host in the DMZ Host IP Address field. 3. Click the Save button. 4.12.4 UPnP Choose menu ForwardingUPnP, and then you can view the information about UPnP in the screen (shown in Figure 4-64). The Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) feature allows the devices, such as Internet computers, to access the local host resources or devices as needed. UPnP devices can be automatically discovered by the UPnP service application on the LAN. Figure 4-64 UPnP Setting
- 72 -
Current UPnP Status - UPnP can be enabled or disabled by clicking the Enable or Disable Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router button. This feature is enabled by default. Current UPnP Settings List - This table displays the current UPnP information. App Description - The description about the application which initiates the UPnP request. External Port - The port which the router opened for the application. Protocol - The type of protocol which is opened. Internal Port - The port which the router opened for local host. IP Address - The IP address of the local host which initiates the UPnP request. Status - Either Enabled or Disabled. "Enabled" means that the port is still active;
otherwise, the port is inactive. Click the Enable button to enable UPnP. Click the Disable button to disable UPnP. Click the Refresh button to update the Current UPnP Settings List. 4.13 Security Figure 4-65 The Security menu There are four submenus under the Security menu as shown in Figure 4-65: Basic Security, Advanced Security, Local Management and Remote Management. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.13.1 Basic Security Choose menu Security Basic Security, and then you can configure the basic security in the screen as shown in Figure 4-66.
- 73 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-66 Basic Security Firewall - A firewall protects your network from the outside world. Here you can enable or disable the routers firewall. SPI Firewall - SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection, also known as dynamic packet filtering) helps to prevent cyber attacks by tracking more state per session. It validates that the traffic passing through the session conforms to the protocol. SPI Firewall is enabled by factory default. If you want all the computers on the LAN exposed to the outside world, you can disable it. VPN - VPN Passthrough must be enabled if you want to allow VPN tunnels using VPN protocols to pass through the router. PPTP Passthrough the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) to be tunneled through an IP network. To allow PPTP tunnels to pass through the router, click Enable.
- Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
(PPTP) allows L2TP Passthrough - Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) is the method used to enable Point-to-Point sessions via the Internet on the Layer Two level. To allow L2TP tunnels to pass through the router, click Enable. IPSec Passthrough - Internet Protocol security (IPSec) is a suite of protocols for ensuring private, secure communications over Internet Protocol (IP) networks, through the use of cryptographic security services. To allow IPSec tunnels to pass through the router, click Enable. ALG - It is recommended to enable Application Layer Gateway (ALG) because ALG allows customized Network Address Translation (NAT) traversal filters to be plugged into the
- 74 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router gateway to support address and port translation for certain application layer "control/data"
protocols such as FTP, TFTP, H323 etc. FTP ALG - To allow FTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT, click Enable. TFTP ALG - To allow TFTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT, click Enable. H323 ALG - To allow Microsoft NetMeeting clients to communicate across NAT, click Enable. RTSP ALG - To allow some media player clients to communicate with some streaming media servers across NAT, click Enable. SIP ALG - To allow some multimedia clients to communicate across NAT, click Enable. Click the Save button to save your settings. 4.13.2 Advanced Security Choose menu Security Advanced Security, and then you can protect the router from being attacked by TCP-SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP-Flood in the screen as shown in Figure 4-67. Figure 4-67 Advanced Security Packets Statistics Interval (5~60) - The default value is 10. Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds from the drop-down list. The Packets Statistics Interval value indicates the time section of the packets statistics. The result of the statistics is used for analysis by SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP-Flood.
- 75 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router DoS Protection - Denial of Service protection. Check the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the DoS protection function. Only when it is enabled, will the flood filters be enabled. Note:
Dos Protection will take effect only when the Traffic Statistics in System Tools Statistics is enabled. Enable ICMP-FLOOD Attack Filtering - Enable or Disable the ICMP-FLOOD Attack Filtering. ICMP-FLOOD Packets Threshold (5~3600) - The default value is 50. Enter a value between 5 ~ 3600. When the current ICMP-FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value, the router will startup the blocking function immediately. Enable UDP-FLOOD Filtering - Enable or Disable the UDP-FLOOD Filtering. UDP-FLOOD Packets Threshold (5~3600) - The default value is 500. Enter a value between 5 ~ 3600. When the current UPD-FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value, the router will startup the blocking function immediately. Enable TCP-SYN-FLOOD Attack Filtering - Enable or Disable the TCP-SYN-FLOOD Attack Filtering. TCP-SYN-FLOOD Packets Threshold (5~3600) - The default value is 50. Enter a value between 5 ~ 3600. When the current TCP-SYN-FLOOD Packets numbers is beyond the set value, the router will startup the blocking function immediately. Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port - Enable or Disable Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port. The default setting is disabled. If enabled, the ping packet from the Internet cannot access the router. Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port - Enable or Disable Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port. The default setting is disabled. If enabled, the ping packet from LAN cannot access the router. This function can be used to defend against some viruses. Click the Save button to save the settings. Click the Blocked DoS Host List button to display the DoS host table by blocking. 4.13.3 Local Management Choose menu Security Local Management, and then you can configure the management rule in the screen as shown in Figure 4-68. The management feature allows you to deny computers in LAN from accessing the router.
- 76 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-68 Local Management By default, the radio button All the PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the Router's Web-Based Utility is checked. If you want to allow PCs with specific MAC Addresses to access the Setup page of the router's Web-Based Utility locally from inside the network, check the radio button Only the PCs listed can browse the built-in web pages to perform Administrator tasks, and then enter each MAC Address in a separate field. The format for the MAC Address is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX (X is any hexadecimal digit). Only the PCs with MAC address listed can use the password to browse the built-in web pages to perform Administrator tasks while all the others will be blocked. After click the Add button, your PC's MAC Address will be placed in the list above. Click the Save button to save your settings. Note:
If your PC is blocked but you want to access the router again, use a pin to press and hold the WPS/Reset button (hole) on the back panel for about 5 seconds to reset the routers factory defaults on the routers Web-Based Utility. 4.13.4 Choose menu Security Remote Management, and then you can configure the Remote Management function in the screen as shown in Figure 4-69. This feature allows you to manage your router from a remote location via the Internet. Remote Management Figure 4-69 Remote Management
- 77 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Web Management Port - Web browser access normally uses the standard HTTP service port 80. This router's default remote management web port number is 80. For greater security, you can change the remote management web port to a custom port by entering that number in the box provided. Choose a number between 1 and 65534 but do not use the number of any common service port. Remote Management IP Address - This is the current address you will use when accessing your router from the Internet. This function is disabled when the IP address is set to the default value of 0.0.0.0. To enable this function change 0.0.0.0 to a valid IP address. If set to 255.255.255.255, then all the hosts can access the router from internet. Note:
1. To access the router, you should type your router's WAN IP address into your browser's address (in IE) or Location (in Navigator) box, followed by a colon and the custom port number. For example, if your router's WAN address is 202.96.12.8, and the port number used is 8080, please enter http://202.96.12.8:8080 in your browser. Later, you may be asked for the router's password. After successfully entering the username and password, you will be able to access the router's web-based utility. 2. Be sure to change the router's default password to a very secure password. 4.14 Parental Control Choose menu Parental Control, and then you can configure the parental control in the screen as shown in Figure 4-70. The Parental Control function can be used to control the internet activities of the child, limit the child to access certain websites and restrict the time of surfing. Figure 4-70 Parental Control Settings To add a new entry, please follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop-up as shown in Figure 4-71.
- 78 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-71 Add or Modify Parental Control Entry MAC Address of Child PC - Enter the MAC address of the PC you want to control, or you can make use of the All MAC Address In Current LAN item below. If you leave it blank, then the rule will be applied to all of the PCs except the parental PC. ALL MAC Address In Current LAN - You can see the MAC addresses of all PCs in current LAN by clicking on the drop-down button. Choose one of them, then this MAC address will be filled to the MAC Address of Child PC field. Website Description - In this field, create a description for the website(s). Note that this description should be unique. Allowed Domain Name - In this field, you can enter 8 domain names allowed for the child to access, either the full name or the keywords (for example TP-LINK). Any domain name with keywords in it (www.tp-link.com, www.tp-link.com.cn) will be allowed. Effective Time - In this field, choose the effective time for the rule or you can make use of Access Control > Schedule to create the schedule as you like. The default value is Anytime. Status - In this field, there are two options, Enabled or Disabled. Enabled means that this rule will take effect while Disabled means that this rule won't take effect. 2. Enter the MAC address of the PC (e.g. 00-11-22-33-44-AA) youd like to control in the MAC Address of Child PC field, or you can choose the MAC address from the All Address in Current LAN drop-down list.
- 79 -
3. Give a description (e.g. Allow TP-LINK) for the website allowed to be accessed in the Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Website Description field. 4. Enter the allowed domain name of the website, either the full name or the keywords (e.g. TP-LINK) in the Allowed Domain Name field. Any domain name with keywords in it
(www.tp-link.com, www.tp-link.com.cn) will be allowed. 5. Select from the Effective Time drop-down list the schedule (e.g. Schedule_1) you want. If there are not suitable schedules for you, click the Schedule in red below to go to the Advance Schedule Settings page and create the schedule you need. 6. In the Status field, you can select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry. 7. Click the Save button. Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list. Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. For example: If you desire that the child PC with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA can access www.tp-link.com on Saturday only while the parent PC with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-BB is without any restriction, you should follow the settings below. 1. Click Parental Control menu on the left to enter the Parental Control Settings page. Check Enable and enter the MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-BB in the MAC Address of Parental PC field. 2. Click Access Control Schedule on the left to enter the Schedule Settings page. Click Add New... button to create a new schedule with Schedule Description is Schedule_1, Day is Sat and Time is all day-24 hours. 3. Click Parental Control menu on the left to go back to the Add or Modify Parental Control Entry page:
1) Click Add New... button. 2) Enter 00-11-22-33-44-AA in the MAC Address of Child PC field. 3) Enter Allow TP-LINK in the Website Description field. 4) Enter www.tp-link.com in the Allowed Domain Name field. 5) Select Schedule_1 you create just now from the Effective Time drop-down list. 6) In Status field, select Enable. 4. Click Save to complete the settings.
- 80 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Then you will go back to the Parental Control Settings page and see the following list, as shown in Figure 4-72. Figure 4-72 Parental Control Settings 4.15 Access Control Figure 4-73 Access Control There are four submenus under the Access Control menu as shown in Figure 4-73: Rule, Host, Target and Schedule. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. 4.15.1 Rule Choose menu Access Control Rule, and then you can view and set Access Control rules in the screen as shown in Figure 4-74.
- 81 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-74 Access Control Rule Management Enable Internet Access Control - Select the check box to enable the Internet Access Control function, so the Default Filter Policy can take effect. Rule Name - Here displays the name of the rule and this name is unique. Host - Here displays the host selected in the corresponding rule. Target - Here displays the target selected in the corresponding rule. Schedule - Here displays the schedule selected in the corresponding rule. Enable - Here displays the status of the rule, enabled or not. Check this option to enable a specific entry. Modify - Here you can edit or delete an existing rule. Setup Wizard - Click the Setup Wizard button to create a new rule entry. Add New... - Click the Add New... button to add a new rule entry. Enable All - Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list. Disable All - Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list. Delete All - Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Move - You can change the entrys order as desired. Enter in the first box the ID number of the entry you want to move and in the second box another ID number, and then click the Move button to change the entries order. Click the Next button to go to the next page. Click the Previous button to return to the previous page.
- 82 -
There are two methods to add a new rule. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Method One:
1. Click Setup Wizard button and the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-75. Figure 4-75 Quick Setup Create a Host Entry Host Description - In this field, create a unique description for the host (e.g. Host_1). Mode - Here are two options, IP Address and MAC Address. You can select either of them from the drop-down list. If the IP Address is selected, you can see the following item:
LAN IP Address - Enter the IP address or address range of the host in dotted-decimal format (e.g. 192.168.0.23). If the MAC Address is selected, you can see the following item:
MAC Address - Enter the MAC address of the host in XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX format
(e.g. 00-11-22-33-44-AA). 2. Click Next when finishing creating the host entry, and the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-76. Figure 4-76 Quick Setup - Create an Access Target Entry
- 83 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Target Description - In this field, create a description for the target. Note that this description should be unique (e.g. Target_1). Mode - Here are two options, IP Address and Domain Name. You can choose either of them from the drop-down list. If the IP Address is selected, you will see the following items:
IP Address - Enter the IP address (or address range) of the target (targets) in dotted-decimal format (e.g. 192.168.0.23). Target Port - Specify the port or port range for the target. For some common service ports, you can make use of the Common Service Port item below. Protocol - Here are four options, All, TCP, UDP, and ICMP. Select one of them from the drop-down list for the target. Common Service Port - Here lists some common service ports. Select one from the drop-down list and the corresponding port number will be filled in the Target Port field automatically. For example, if you select "FTP", "21" will be filled in the Target Port automatically. If the Domain Name is selected, you will see the following items:
Domain Name - Here you can enter 4 domain names, either the full name or the it
(for example, TP-LINK). Any domain name with keywords keywords
(www.tp-link.com, www.tp-link.com.cn) will be blocked or allowed. in 3. Click Next when finishing creating the access target entry, and the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-77. Figure 4-77 Quick Setup - Create an Advanced Schedule Entry Schedule Description - In this field, create a description for the schedule. Note that this description should be unique (e.g. Schedule_1). Day - Choose Select Days and select the certain day (days), or choose Everyday.
- 84 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Time - Select "24 hours", or specify the Start Time and Stop Time yourself. Start Time - Enter the start time in HHMM format (HHMM are 4 numbers). For example 0800 is 8:00. Stop Time - Enter the stop time in HHMM format (HHMM are 4 numbers). For example 2000 is 20:00. 4. Click Next when finishing creating the advanced schedule entry, and the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-78. Figure 4-78 Quick Setup - Create an Internet Access Control Entry Rule - In this field, create a name for the rule. Note that this name should be unique (e.g. Rule 1). Host - In this field, select a host from the drop-down list for the rule. The default value is the Host Description you set just now. Target - In this filed, select a target from the drop-down list for the rule. The default value is the Target Description you set just now. Schedule - In this field, select a schedule from the drop-down list for the rule. The default value is the Schedule Description you set just now. Status - In this field, there are two options, Enabled or Disabled. Select Enabled so that the rule will take effect. Select Disabled so that the rule won't take effect. 5. Click Finish to complete adding a new rule. Method Two:
1. Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4-79. 2. Give a name (e.g. Rule_1) for the rule in the Rule Name field. 3. Select a host from the Host drop-down list or choose Click Here To Add New Host List. 4. Select a target from the Target drop-sown list or choose Click Here To Add New Target List.
- 85 -
5. Select a schedule from the Schedule drop-down list or choose Click Here To Add New Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Schedule. 6. In the Status field, select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry. 7. Click the Save button. Figure 4-79 Add Internet Access Control Entry For example: If you desire to allow the host with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA to access www.tp-link.com only from 18:00 to 20:00 on Saturday and Sunday, and forbid other hosts in the LAN to access the Internet, you should follow the settings below:
1. Click the submenu Rule of Access Control in the left to return to the Rules List page. Select Enable Internet Access Control and choose "Allow the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the router". 2. We recommend that you click Setup Wizard button to finish all the following settings. 3. Click the submenu Host of Access Control in the left to enter the Host List page. Add a new entry with the Host Description is Host_1 and MAC Address is 00-11-22-33-44-AA. 4. Click the submenu Target of Access Control in the left to enter the Target List page. Add a new entry with the Target Description is Target_1 and Domain Name is www.tp-link.com. 5. Click the submenu Schedule of Access Control in the left to enter the Schedule List page. Add a new entry with the Schedule Description is Schedule_1, Day is Sat and Sun, Start Time is 1800 and Stop Time is 2000. 6. Click the submenu Rule of Access Control in the left, Click Add New... button to add a new rule as follows:
1) 2) 3) 4) In Rule Name field, create a name for the rule. Note that this name should be unique, for example Rule_1. In Host field, select Host_1. In Target field, select Target_1. In Schedule field, select Schedule_1.
- 86 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 5) In Status field, select Enabled. 6) Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Access Control Rule Management page and see the following list. 4.15.2 Host Choose menu Access Control Host, and then you can view and set a Host list in the screen as shown in Figure 4-80. The host list is necessary for the Access Control Rule. Figure 4-80 Host Settings Host Description - Here displays the description of the host and this description is unique. Information - Here displays the information about the host. It can be IP or MAC. Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. To add a new entry, please follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New button. 2. In the Mode field, select IP Address or MAC Address. 1) If you select IP Address, the screen shown is Figure 4-81. In Host Description field, create a unique description for the host (e.g. Host_1). In LAN IP Address field, enter the IP address. 2) If you select MAC Address, the screen shown is Figure 4-82. In Host Description field, create a unique description for the host (e.g. Host_2). In MAC Address field, enter the MAC address. 3. Click the Save button to complete the settings. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page.
- 87 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-81 Add or Modify a Host Entry Figure 4-82 Add or Modify a Host Entry For example: If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA, you should first follow the settings below:
1. Click Add New... button in Figure 4-80 to enter the Add or Modify a Host Entry page. 2. 3. 4. In Mode field, select MAC Address from the drop-down list. In Host Description field, create a unique description for the host (e.g. Host_2). In MAC Address field, enter 00-11-22-33-44-AA. 5. Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Host Settings page and see the following list. 4.15.3 Target Choose menu Access Control Target, and then you can view and set a Target list in the screen as shown in Figure 4-83. The target list is necessary for the Access Control Rule.
- 88 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-83 Target Settings Target Description - Here displays the description about the target and this description is unique. Information - The target can be IP address, port, or domain name. Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. To add a new entry, please follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New button. 2. 3. In Mode field, select IP Address or Domain Name. If you select IP Address, the screen shown is Figure 4-84. Figure 4-84 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry In Target Description field, create a unique description for the target (e.g. Target_1). In IP Address field, enter the IP address of the target. 1) 2) 3) Select a common service from Common Service Port drop-down list, so that the Target Port will be automatically filled. If the Common Service Port drop-down list doesnt have the service you want, specify the Target Port manually. In Protocol field, select TCP, UDP, ICMP or ALL from the drop-down list. 4) 4. If you select Domain Name, the screen shown is Figure 4-85.
- 89 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-85 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry 1) 2) In Target Description field, create a unique description for the target (e.g. Target_1). In Domain Name field, enter the domain name, either the full name or the keywords (for example, TP-LINK) in the blank. Any domain name with keywords in it (www.tp-link.com, www.tp-link.com.cn) will be blocked or allowed. You can enter 4 domain names. 5. Click the Save button. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. For example: If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA in the LAN to access www.tp-link.com only, you should first follow the settings below:
1. Click Add New button in Figure 4-83 to enter the Add or Modify an Access Target Entry page. 2. 3. 4. In Mode field, select Domain Name from the drop-down list. In Target Description field, create a unique description for the target (e.g. Target_1). In Domain Name field, enter www.tp-link.com. 5. Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Target Settings page and see the following list. 4.15.4 Schedule Choose menu Access Control Schedule, and then you can view and set a Schedule list in the next screen as shown in Figure 4-86. The Schedule list is necessary for the Access Control Rule.
- 90 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-86 Schedule Settings Schedule Description - Here displays the description of the schedule and this description is unique. Day - Here displays the day(s) in a week. Time - Here displays the time period in a day. Modify - Here you can edit or delete an existing schedule. To add a new schedule, follow the steps below:
1. Click Add New... button shown in Figure 4-86 and the next screen will pop-up as shown in Figure 4-87. 2. 3. 4. In Schedule Description field, create a unique description for the schedule (e.g. Schedule_1). In Day field, select the day or days you need. In Time field, you can select all day-24 hours or you may enter the Start Time and Stop Time in the corresponding field. 5. Click Save to complete the settings. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. Figure 4-87 Advanced Schedule Settings
- 91 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router For example: If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA to access www.tp-link.com only from 18:00 to 20:00 on Saturday and Sunday, you should first follow the settings below:
1. Click Add New... button shown in Figure 4-86 to enter the Advanced Schedule Settings page. 2. 3. 4. In Schedule Description field, create a unique description for the schedule (e.g. Schedule_1). In Day field, check the Select Days radio button and then select Sat and Sun. In Time field, enter 1800 in Start Time field and 2000 in Stop Time field. 5. Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Schedule Settings page and see the following list. 4.16 Advanced Routing Figure 4-88 Advanced Routing There are two submenus under the Advanced Routing menu as shown in Figure 4-88: Static Routing List and System Routing Table. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. 4.16.1 Static Routing List Choose menu Advanced Routing Static Routing List, and then you can configure the static route in the next screen (shown in Figure 4-89). A static route is a pre-determined path that network information must travel to reach a specific host or network. Figure 4-89 Static Routing
- 92 -
To add static routing entries:
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1. Click Add New shown in Figure 4-89, you will see the following screen. Figure 4-90 Add or Modify a Static Route Entry 2. Enter the following data:
Destination Network - The Destination Network is the address of the network or host that you want to assign to a static route. Subnet Mask - The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP Address is the network portion, and which portion is the host portion. Default Gateway - This is the IP Address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the router and the network or host. 3. Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop-down list. 4. Click the Save button to make the entry take effect. Other configurations for the entries:
Click the Delete button to delete the entry. Click the Enable All button to enable all the entries. Click the Disable All button to disable all the entries. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries. Click the Previous button to view the information in the previous screen, click the Next button to view the information in the next screen. 4.16.2 System Routing Table Choose menu Advanced Routing System Routing Table, and then you can view the System Routing Table in the next screen (shown in Figure 4-91). System routing table views all of the valid route entries in use. The Destination IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and Interface will be displayed for each entry.
- 93 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-91 System Routing Table Destination Network - The Destination Network is the address of the network or host to which the static route is assigned. Subnet Mask - The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP address is the network portion, and which portion is the host portion. Gateway - This is the IP address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the router and the network or host. Interface - This interface tells you either the Destination IP Address is on the LAN & WLAN
(internal wired and wireless networks), or on the WAN (Internet). 4.17 Bandwidth Control Figure 4-92 Bandwidth Control There are two submenus under the Bandwidth Control menu as shown in Figure 4-92: Control Settings and Rules List. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below. 4.17.1 Control Settings Choose menu Bandwidth Control Control Settings, and then you can configure the Egress Bandwidth and Ingress Bandwidth in the next screen. Their values you configure should be less than 100000Kbps. For optimal control of the bandwidth, please select the right Line Type and ask your ISP for the total bandwidth of the egress and ingress.
- 94 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-93 Bandwidth Control Settings Enable Bandwidth Control - Check this box so that the Bandwidth Control settings can take effect. Line Type - Select the right type for you network connection. If you dont know how to choose, please ask your ISP for the information. Egress Bandwidth - The upload speed through the Internet port. Ingress Bandwidth - The download speed through the Internet port. 4.17.2 Rules List Choose menu Bandwidth Control Rules List, and then you can view and configure the Bandwidth Control rules in the screen below. Figure 4-94 Bandwidth Control Rules List Description - This is the information about the rules such as address range. Egress bandwidth - This field displays the max and mix upload bandwidth through the Internet port, the default is 0. Ingress bandwidth - This field displays the max and mix download bandwidth through the Internet port, the default is 0. Enable - This displays the status of the rule. Modify - Click Modify to edit the rule. Click Delete to delete the rule. To add/modify a Bandwidth Control rule, follow the steps below. 1. Click Add New shown in Figure 4-94, you will see a new screen shown in Figure 4-95.
- 95 -
2. Enter the information like the screen shown below. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-95 Bandwidth Control Rule Settings 3. Click the Save button. 4.18 IP & MAC Binding Figure 4-96 the IP & MAC Binding menu There are two submenus under the IP &MAC Binding menu (shown in Figure 4-96): Binding Settings and ARP List. Click any of them, and you will be able to scan or configure the corresponding function. The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below. 4.18.1 Binding Settings This page displays the IP & MAC Binding Setting table; you can operate it in accord with your desire (shown in Figure 4-97). Figure 4-97 Binding Setting MAC Address - The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN. IP Address - The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN.
- 96 -
Bind - Check this option to enable ARP binding for a specific device. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. When you want to add or modify an IP & MAC Binding entry, you can click the Add New button or Modify button, and then you will go to the next page. This page is used for adding or modifying an IP & MAC Binding entry (shown in Figure 4-98). Figure 4-98 IP & MAC Binding Setting (Add & Modify) To add IP & MAC Binding entries, follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New... button as shown in Figure 4-97. 2. Enter the MAC Address and IP Address. 3. Select the Bind checkbox. 4. Click the Save button to save it. Figure 4-99 To modify or delete an existing entry, follow the steps below. 1. Find the desired entry in the table. 2. Click Modify or Delete as desired on the Modify column. To find an existing entry, follow the steps below. 1. Click the Find button as shown in Figure 4-99. 2. Enter the MAC Address or IP Address.
- 97 -
3. Click the Find button on the page. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-100 Find IP & MAC Binding Entry ARP List 4.18.2 To manage the computer, you could observe the computers in the LAN by checking the relationship of MAC address and IP address on the ARP list, and you could also configure the items on the ARP list. This page displays the ARP List; it shows all the existing IP & MAC Binding entries (shown in Figure 4-101). Figure 4-101 ARP List IP Address - The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN. MAC Address - The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN. Status - Indicates whether or not the MAC and IP addresses are bound. Configure - Load or delete an item. Load - Load the item to the IP & MAC Binding list. Delete - Delete the item. Click the Bind All button to bind all the current items, available after enable. Click the Load All button to load all items to the IP & MAC Binding list. Click the Refresh button to refresh all items. Note:
An item could not be loaded to the IP & MAC Binding list if the IP address of the item has been loaded before. Error warning will prompt as well. Likewise, "Load All" only loads the items without interference to the IP & MAC Binding list.
- 98 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4.19 Dynamic DNS Choose menu Dynamic DNS, and you can configure the Dynamic DNS function. The router offers the DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System) feature, which allows the hosting of a website, FTP server, or e-mail server with a fixed domain name (named by yourself) and a dynamic IP address, and then your friends can connect to your server by entering your domain name no matter what your IP address is. Before using this feature, you need to sign up for DDNS service providers such as www.comexe.cn, www.dyn.com, or www.noip.com. The Dynamic DNS client service provider will give you a password or key. 4.19.1 Comexe DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www.comexe.cn, the page will appear as shown in Figure 4-102. Figure 4-102 Comexe DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the Domain Name your dynamic DNS service provider gave. 2. Enter the User Name for your DDNS account. 3. Enter the Password for your DDNS account. 4. Click the Login button to login the DDNS service. Connection Status -The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here. Click Logout to log out of the DDNS service.
- 99 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Note:
If you want to login again with another account after a successful login, please click the Logout button, then input your new username and password and click the Login button. 4.19.2 Dyndns DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www.dyn.com, the page will appear as shown in Figure 4-103. Figure 4-103 Dyndns DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the User Name for your DDNS account. 2. Enter the Password for your DDNS account. 3. Enter the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider. 4. Click the Login button to login to the DDNS service. Connection Status -The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here. Click Logout to logout of the DDNS service. Note:
If you want to login again with another account after a successful login, please click the Logout button, then input your new username and password and click the Login button. 4.19.3 No-IP DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www.noip.com, the page will appear as shown in Figure 4-104.
- 100 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-104 No-IP DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the User Name for your DDNS account. 2. Enter the Password for your DDNS account. 3. Enter the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider. 4. Click the Login button to login to the DDNS service. Connection Status - The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here. Click Logout to log out the DDNS service. Note:
If you want to login again with another account after a successful login, please click the Logout button, then input your new username and password and click the Login button. 4.20 IPv6 Support Figure 4-105 IPv6 Support There are two submenus under the IPv6 Support menu (shown in Figure 4-105): IPv6 Status and IPv6 Setup. Click either of them, and you will be able to scan or configure the corresponding function. The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below.
- 101 -
4.20.1 IPv6 Status Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-106 IPv6 Status The IPv6 Status page displays the router's current IPv6 status and configuration. All information is read-only. WAN Connection Type - The IPv6 connection way for WAN IPv6 Address - The WAN IPv6 address IPv6 Default Gateway - The router's default gateway Primary IPv6 DNS - The primary IPv6 DNS address Secondary IPv6 DNS - The secondary IPv6 DNS address LAN
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address:
SLAAC
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address.
- 102 -
4.20.2 IPv6 Setup Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-107 Enable/Disable IPv6 Enable IPv6 - Tick the checkbox to enable the IPv6 function. Its enabled by default. WAN Connection Type - Choose the correct WAN connection type based on your ISP network topology. DHCPv6 - Connections which use dynamic IPv6 address assignment. Static IPv6 - Connections which use static IPv6 address assignment. PPPoEv6 - Connections which use PPPoEV6 that requires a user name and password. Tunnel 6to4 - Connections which use 6to4 address assignment. Different types of WAN connection require you to do different settings. Below are the detailed explanations for the respective type.
- 103 -
1) DHCPv6 Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-108 DHCPv6 Get non-temporary IPv6 address - Get a non-temporary IPv6 address from the ISP. Get IPv6 prefix delegation - Get a temporary IPv6 address and IPv6 prefix from the ISP, the temporary IPv6 address is set to the WAN port, and the LAN port advertise IPv6 address by RADVD or DHCPs. IPv6 Address - The IPv6 address assigned by your ISP dynamically. Click the Renew button to renew the IPv6 parameters from your ISP. Click the Release button to release the IPv6 parameters from your ISP. If your ISP gives you one or two DNS IPv6 addresses, select Use the following IPv6 DNS Servers and enter the Primary IPv6 DNS and Secondary IPv6 DNS into the correct fields. Otherwise, the DNS servers will be assigned from ISP dynamically. Primary IPv6 DNS - Enter the DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Secondary IPv6 DNS - Enter another DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Note:
If you get Address not found error when you access a Web site, it is likely that your DNS servers are set up improperly. You should contact your ISP to get DNS server addresses.
- 104 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Get IPv6 with Unicast DHCP - A few ISPs' DHCP servers do not support the broadcast applications. If you can't get the IPv6 Address normally, you can choose Unicast. (You generally need not to check this option). IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address: SLAAC
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address. 2) Static IPv6 Figure 4-109 Static IPv6 IPv6 Address - Enter the IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Default Gateway - Enter the default gateway in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes. For some ISPs, you may need to modify the MTU. But this is rarely required, and should not be done unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP connection.
- 105 -
Primary DNS - Enter the DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Secondary DNS - Enter another DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address: SLAAC
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address. 3) PPPoEv6 Figure 4-110 PPPoEv6 User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. Get IPv6 Address Way Get non-temporary IPv6 address - Get a non-temporary IPv6 address by DHCPv6 from the ISP.
- 106 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Get IPv6 prefix delegation - Get a prefix delegation IPv6 address by DHCPv6 from the ISP, and the clients in LAN create IPv6 address with the delegation. Use IP address specified by ISP - Input a static IPv6 address from the ISP Click the Connect button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address: SLAAC
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address. 4) Tunnel 6to4 Figure 4-111 Tunnel 6to4 Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway - the IPv4 address/ subnet mask/ default gateway assigned, in dotted-decimal notation. MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1480 Bytes. For some ISPs, you may need to modify the MTU. But this is rarely required, and should not be done unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP connection.
- 107 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router If your ISP gives you one or two DNS IPv6 addresses, select Use the following IPv6 DNS Servers and enter the Primary IPv6 DNS and Secondary IPv6 DNS into the correct fields. Otherwise, the DNS servers will be assigned from ISP dynamically. Primary IPv6 DNS - Enter the DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Secondary IPv6 DNS - Enter another DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address by your ISP. IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address: SLAAC
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address. 4.21 System Tools Figure 4-112 The System Tools menu Choose menu System Tools, and you can see the submenus under the main menu: Time Settings, Diagnostic, Firmware Upgrade, Factory Defaults, Backup & Restore, Reboot, Password, System Log and Statistics. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below.
- 108 -
4.21.1 Time Settings Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu System Tools Time Settings, and then you can configure the time on the following screen. Figure 4-113 Time settings Time Zone - Select your local time zone from this pull down list. Date - Enter your local date in MM/DD/YY into the right blanks. Time - Enter your local time in HH/MM/SS into the right blanks. NTP Server I / NTP Server II - Enter the address or domain of the NTP Server I or NTP Server II, and then the router will get the time from the NTP Server preferentially. In addition, the router built-in some common NTP Servers, so it can get time automatically once it connects the Internet. Enable Daylight Saving - Check the box to enable the Daylight Saving function. Start - The time to start the Daylight Saving. Select the month in the first field, the week in the second field, the day in the third field and the time in the last field. End - The time to end the Daylight Saving. Select the month in the first field, the week in the second field, the day in the third field and the time in the last field. Daylight Saving Status - Displays the status whether the Daylight Saving is in use. To set time manually:
1. Select your local time zone. 2. Enter the Date in Month/Day/Year format.
- 109 -
3. Enter the Time in Hour/Minute/Second format. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4. Click Save. To set time automatically:
1. Select your local time zone. 2. Enter the address or domain of the NTP Server I or NTP Server II. 3. Click the Get GMT button to get system time from Internet if you have connected to the Internet. To set Daylight Saving:
1. Check the box to enable Daylight Saving. 2. Select the start time from the drop-down lists in the Start field. 3. Select the end time from the drop-down lists in the End field. 4. Click the Save button to save the settings. Figure 4-114 Time settings Note:
1. This setting will be used for some time-based functions such as firewall. You must specify your time zone once you login to the router successfully, otherwise, these functions will not take effect. 2. The time will be lost if the router is turned off. 3. The router will automatically obtain GMT from the Internet if it is configured accordingly. 4. The Daylight Saving will take effect one minute after the configurations are completed. 4.21.2 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic, and then you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen.
- 110 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-115 Diagnostic Tool Diagnostic Tool - Check the radio button to select one diagnostic too. Ping - This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity, reachability, and name resolution to a given host or gateway. Traceroute - This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection. Note:
You can use ping/traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name. If pinging/tracerouting the IP address is successful, but pinging/tracerouting the domain name is not, you might have a name resolution problem. In this case, ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System (DNS) queries. IP Address/Domain Name - Enter the IP Address or Domain Name of the PC whose connection you wish to diagnose. Pings Count - Specifies the number of Echo Request messages sent. The default is 4. Ping Packet Size - Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent. The default is 64. Ping Timeout - Time to wait for a response, in milliseconds. The default is 800. Traceroute Max TTL - Set the maximum number of hops (max TTL to be reached) in the path to search for the target (destination). The default is 20. Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet. The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis.
- 111 -
If the result is similar to the following screen, the connectivity of the Internet is fine. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-116 Diagnostic Results Note:
1. Only one user can use the diagnostic tools at one time. 2.
"Ping Count", "Ping Packet Size" and "Ping Timeout" are Ping Parameters, and "Traceroute Max TTL" is Traceroute Parameter. 4.21.3 Firmware Upgrade Choose menu System Tools Firmware Upgrade, and then you can update the latest version of firmware for the router on the following screen. Firmware Version - Displays the current firmware version. Figure 4-117 Firmware Upgrade Hardware Version - Displays the current hardware version. The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the routers current hardware version. To upgrade the router's firmware, follow these instructions below:
1. Download a most recent firmware upgrade file from our website (www.tp-link.com). 2. Enter or select the path name where you save the downloaded file on the computer into the File blank. 3. Click the Upgrade button. 4. The router will reboot while the upgrading has been finished.
- 112 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Note:
1) New firmware versions are posted at www.tp-link.com and can be downloaded for free. There is no need to upgrade the firmware unless the new firmware has a new feature you want to use. However, when experiencing problems caused by the router rather than the configuration, you can try to upgrade the firmware. 2) When you upgrade the router's firmware, you may lose its current configurations, so before upgrading the firmware please write down some of your customized settings to avoid losing important settings. 3) Do not turn off the router or press the Reset button while the firmware is being upgraded. Loss of power during the upgrade could damage the router. 4) The firmware version must correspond to the hardware. 5) The upgrade process takes a few moments and the router restarts automatically when the upgrade is complete. 4.21.4 Factory Defaults Choose menu System Tools Factory Defaults, and then and you can restore the configurations of the router to factory defaults on the following screen Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values. Figure 4-118 Restore Factory Default The default User Name: admin The default Password: admin The default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Note:
All changed settings will be lost when defaults are restored. 4.21.5 Backup & Restore Choose menu System Tools Backup & Restore, and then you can save the current configuration of the router as a backup file and restore the configuration via a backup file as shown in Figure 4-119.
- 113 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-119 Backup & Restore Configuration Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer. To upgrade the router's configuration, follow these instructions. Click the Browse button to find the configuration file which you want to restore. Click the Restore button to update the configuration with the file whose path is the one you have input or selected in the blank. Note:
The current configuration will be covered with the uploading configuration file. Wrong process will lead the device unmanaged. The restoring process lasts for 20 seconds and the router will restart automatically then. Keep the power of the router on during the process, in case of any damage. 4.21.6 Reboot Choose menu System Tools Reboot, and then you can click the Reboot button to reboot the router via the next screen. Figure 4-120 Reboot the router Some settings of the router will take effect only after rebooting, which include Change the LAN IP Address (system will reboot automatically). Change the DHCP Settings. Change the Wireless configurations. Change the Web Management Port. Upgrade the firmware of the router (system will reboot automatically). Restore the router's settings to factory defaults (system will reboot automatically). Update the configuration with the file (system will reboot automatically.
- 114 -
4.21.7 Password Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu System Tools Password, and then you can change the factory default user name and password of the router in the next screen as shown in Figure 4-121. Figure 4-121 Password It is strongly recommended that you should change the factory default user name and password of the router, because all users who try to access the router's Web-based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted for the router's default user name and password. Note:
The new user name and password can contain between 1-15 characters in length but not include any spaces. Enter the new Password twice to confirm it. Click the Save button when finished. Click the Clear All button to clear all. 4.21.8 System Log Choose menu System Tools System Log, and then you can view the logs of the router.
- 115 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-122 System Log Auto Mail Feature - Indicates whether auto mail feature is enabled or not. Mail Settings - Set the receiving and sending mailbox address, server address, validation information as well as the timetable for Auto Mail Feature, as shown in Figure 4-123. Figure 4-123 Mail Account Settings From - Your mail box address. The router would connect it to send logs. To - Recipients address. The destination mailbox where the logs would be received. SMTP Server - Your smtp server. It corresponds with the mailbox filled in the From field. You can log on the relevant website for help if you are not clear with the address. Authentication - Most SMTP Server requires Authentication. It is required by most mailboxes that need User Name and Password to log in.
- 116 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Note:
Only when you select Authentication, do you have to enter the User Name and Password in the following fields. User Name - Your mail account name filled in the From field. The part behind @ is included. Password - Your mail account password. Confirm The Password - Enter the password again to confirm. Enable Auto Mail Feature - Select it to mail logs automatically. You could mail the current logs either at a specified time every day or by intervals, but only one could be the current effective rule. Enter the desired time or intervals in the corresponding field as shown in Figure 4-123. Click Save to keep your settings. Click Back to return to the previous page. Log Type - By selecting the log type, only logs of this type will be shown. Log Level - By selecting the log level, only logs of this level will be shown. Refresh - Refresh the page to show the latest log list. Save Log - Click to save all the logs in a txt file. Mail Log - Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings. Clear Log - All the logs will be deleted from the router permanently, not just from the page. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. 4.21.9 Statistics Choose menu System Tools Statistics, and then you can view the statistics of the router, including total traffic and current traffic of the last Packets Statistic Interval.
- 117 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-124 Statistics Current Statistics Status - Enable or Disable. The default value is disabled. To enable it, click the Enable button. If it is disabled, the function of DoS protection in Security settings will be disabled. Packets Statistics Interval 5-60 - The default value is 10. Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds in the drop-down list. The Packets Statistic interval indicates the time section of the packets statistic. Sorted Rules - Choose how the displayed statistics are sorted. Select the Auto-refresh checkbox to refresh automatically. Click the Refresh button to refresh immediately. Click Reset All to reset the values of all the entries to zero. Click Delete All to delete all entries in the table. Statistics Table:
IP/MAC Address Total Current Packets Bytes Packets Bytes ICMP Tx The IP and MAC address are displayed with related statistics. The total number of packets received and transmitted by the router. The total number of bytes received and transmitted by the router. The total number of packets received and transmitted in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds. The total number of bytes received and transmitted in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds. The number of the ICMP packets transmitted to WAN per second at the specified Packets Statistics interval. It is shown like current transmitting rate / Max transmitting rate.
- 118 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router UDP Tx TCP SYN Tx Reset Delete The number of UDP packets transmitted to the WAN per second at the specified Packets Statistics interval. It is shown like current transmitting rate / Max transmitting rate. The number of TCP SYN packets transmitted to the WAN per second at the specified Packets Statistics interval. It is shown like current transmitting rate / Max transmitting rate. Reset the value of he entry to zero. Delete the existing entry in the table. Modify There would be 5 entries on each page. Click Previous to return to the previous page and Next to the next page. 4.22 Logout Click the Logout tab at the bottom of the main menu, and then the web-page will be logged out and return to the login window.
- 119 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Appendix A: FAQ 1. How do I configure the router to access Internet by ADSL users?
1) First, configure the ADSL Modem configured in RFC1483 bridge model. 2) Connect the Ethernet cable from your ADSL Modem to the Internet port on the router. The telephone cord plugs into the Line port of the ADSL Modem. 3) Login to the router, click the Network menu on the left of your browser, and click "WAN"
submenu. On the WAN page, select PPPoE/Russia PPPoE for WAN Connection Type. Type user name in the User Name field and password in the Password field, type password in the Confirm Password field again, finish by clicking Connect. Figure A-1 PPPoE Connection Type 4) If your ADSL lease is in pay-according-time mode, select Connect on Demand or Connect Manually for Internet connection mode. Type an appropriate number for Max Idle Time to avoid wasting paid time. Otherwise, you can select Auto-connecting for Internet connection mode. Figure A-2 PPPoE Connection Mode Note:
1. Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time, since some applications is visiting the Internet continually in the background. If you are a Cable user, please configure the router following the above steps. 2.
- 120 -
2. How do I configure the router to access Internet by Ethernet users?
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1) Login to the router, click the Network menu on the left of your browser, and click "WAN"
submenu. On the WAN page, select Dynamic IP for "WAN Connection Type", finish by clicking Save. 2) Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter, which is connected to your cable/DSL Modem during installation. If your ISP requires MAC register, login to the router and click the "Network" menu link on the left of your browser, and then click "MAC Clone" submenu link. On the "MAC Clone" page, if your PCs MAC address is proper MAC address, click the "Clone MAC Address" button and your PCs MAC address will fill in the "WAN MAC Address" field. Or else, type the MAC Address the MAC Address into is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Then click the "Save" button. It will take effect after rebooting. the "WAN MAC Address"
field. The format for Figure A-3 MAC Clone 3. I want to use Netmeeting, what do I need to do?
1) 2) If you start Netmeeting as a host, you dont need to do anything with the router. If you start as a response, you need to configure Virtual Server or DMZ Host and make sure the H323 ALG is enabled. 3) How to configure Virtual Server: Log in to the router, click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser, and click "Virtual Servers" submenu. On the "Virtual Servers"
page, click Add New. Then on the Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry page, enter 1720 for the Service Port blank, and your IP address for the IP Address blank, taking 192.168.0.169 for an example, remember to select the Status to be Enabled and Save. Figure A-4 Virtual Servers
- 121 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure A-5 Add or Modify a Virtual server Entry Note:
Your opposite side should call your WAN IP, which is displayed on the Status page. 4) How to enable DMZ Host: Log in to the router, click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser, and click "DMZ" submenu. On the "DMZ" page, click Enable radio button and type your IP address into the DMZ Host IP Address field, using 192.168.0.169 as an example, remember to click the Save button. Figure A-6 DMZ 5) How to enable H323 ALG: Log in to the router, click the Security menu on the left of your browser, and click Basic Security submenu. On the Basic Security page, check the Enable radio button next to H323 ALG. Remember to click the Save button.
- 122 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4. I want to build a WEB Server on the LAN, what should I do?
Figure A-7 Basic Security 1) Because the WEB Server port 80 will interfere with the WEB management port 80 on the router, you must change the WEB management port number to avoid interference. 2) To change the WEB management port number: Log in to the router, click the Security menu on the left of your browser, and click "Remote Management" submenu. On the
"Remote Management" page, type a port number except 80, such as 88, into the "Web Management Port" field. Click Save and reboot the router. Figure A-8 Remote Management Note:
If the above configuration takes effect, you can visit and configure the router by typing http://192.168.0.1:88 (the routers LAN IP address: Web Management Port) in the address field of the Web browser. If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192.168.0.x, the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.1.1 to avoid IP conflict; in this case, please try http://192.168.1.1:88.
- 123 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 3) Log in to the router, click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser, and click the "Virtual Servers" submenu. On the "Virtual Servers" page, click Add New, then on the Add or Modify a Virtual Server page, enter 80 into the blank next to the Service Port, and your IP address next to the IP Address, assuming 192.168.0.188 for an example, remember to select the status to be Enabled and Save. Figure A-9 Virtual Servers Figure A-10 Add or Modify a Virtual server Entry 5. The wireless stations cannot connect to the router. 1) Make sure the "Wireless router Radio" is enabled. 2) Make sure that the wireless stations' SSID accord with the router's SSID. 3) Make sure the wireless stations have right KEY for encryption when the router is encrypted. 4) If the wireless connection is ready, but you cant access the router, check the IP Address of your wireless stations.
- 124 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Appendix B: Configuring the PC In this section, well introduce how to install and configure the TCP/IP correctly in Windows 7. First make sure your Ethernet Adapter is working, refer to the adapters manual if needed. 1. Install TCP/IP component 1) On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, and then click Control Panel. 2) Click the Network and Internet, and click the Network and Sharing Center, then click Change adapter settings. 3) Right click the icon that showed below, select Properties on the prompt page. Figure B-1 4) In the prompt page that showed below, double click on the Internet Protocol Version 4
(TCP/IPv4).
- 125 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure B-2 5) The following TCP/IP Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on this window by default. Now you have two ways to configure the TCP/IP protocol below:
Setting IP address automatically Select Obtain an IP address automatically, Choose Obtain DNS server automatically, as shown in the Figure below:
Figure B-3 Setting IP address manually 1 Select Use the following IP address radio button. And the following items available
- 126 -
2 Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router If the router's LAN IP address is 192.168.0.1, specify the IP address as 192.168.0.x (x is from 2 to 254), and Subnet mask is 255.255.255.0. 3 Type the routers LAN IP address (the default IP is 192.168.0.1) into the Default gateway field. 4 Select Use the following DNS server addresses radio button. In the Preferred DNS Server field you can type the DNS server IP address, which has been provided by your ISP Figure B-4
- 127 -
Appendix C: Specifications Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router General Standards Protocols Ports IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11e, IEEE 802.11i, IEEE 802.1X, IEEE 802.3X, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u, IEEE 802.3ab TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, ICMP, NAT, SNTP 1 10/100/1000M Auto-Negotiation Internet RJ45 port;
4 10/100/1000M Auto-Negotiation Ethernet RJ45 ports supporting Auto MDI/MDIX;
2 USB ports supporting storage/FTP/Media/Print Server;
10BASE-T: UTP category 3, 4, 5 cable (maximum 100m) EIA/TIA-568 100 STP (maximum 100m) Cabling Type 100BASE-TX: UTP category 5, 5e cable (maximum 100m) EIA/TIA-568 100 STP (maximum 100m) LEDs Safety & Emissions Wireless Frequency Band*
Radio Data Rate 1000BASE-TX: UTP category 5, 5e cable (maximum 100m) EIA/TIA-568 100 STP (maximum 100m) Power, System, Wireless 2.4GHz, Wireless 5GHz, Ethernet (1-4), Internet, WPS FCC, CE 2.4GHz, 5GHz 11b: 1/2/5.5/11Mbps 11a/g: 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54/Mbps 11n: 45/90/135/180/270/360/405/450Mbps 11ac: up to 1.3Gbps Frequency Expansion DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) Modulation Security Sensitivity @PER Antenna 11ac: 256-QAM for OFDM 11n/g/a: QPSK,BPSK,16-QAM, 64-QAM for OFDM 11b: CCK,DQPSK,DBPSK WEP, WPA/WPA2, WPA2-PSK/WPA-PSK 5G 2.4G 11a 6Mbps-96dBm 11g 54M-77dBm 11a 54Mbps-79dBm 11n HT20-74dmB 11ac HT20-71dBm 11n HT40-72dBm 11ac HT40-66dBm 11ac HT80-63dBm Three 5GHz 5dBi detachable antennas (RP-SMA) Three 2.4GHz internal antennas Environmental and Physical Temperature Humidity Operating: 0~40 (32~104) Storage: -40~70 (-40~158) Operating: 10% - 90% RH, Non-condensing Storage: 5% - 90% RH, Non-condensing
* Only 2.412GHz~2.462GHz is allowed to be used in USA, which means only channel 1~11 is available for American users to choose.
- 128 -
Appendix D: Glossary Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 802.11ac - IEEE 802.11ac is a wireless computer networking standard of 802.11.This specification will enable multi-station WLAN throughput of at least 1 gigabit per second .This is accomplished by extending the air interface concepts embraced by 802.11n: wider RF bandwidth, more MIMO spatial streams, multi-user MIMO, and high-density modulation (up to 256 QAM). 802.11n - 802.11n builds upon previous 802.11 standards by adding MIMO (multiple-input multiple-output). MIMO uses multiple transmitter and receiver antennas to allow for increased data throughput via spatial multiplexing and increased range by exploiting the spatial diversity, perhaps through coding schemes like Alamouti coding. The Enhanced Wireless Consortium
(EWC) [3] was formed to help accelerate the IEEE 802.11n development process and promote a technology specification for interoperability of next-generation wireless local area networking (WLAN) products. 802.11b - The 802.11b standard specifies a wireless networking at 11 Mbps using direct-sequence spread-spectrum (DSSS) technology and operating in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2.4GHz, and WEP encryption for security. 802.11b networks are also referred to as Wi-Fi networks. 802.11g - specification for wireless networking at 54 Mbps using direct-sequence spread-spectrum (DSSS) technology, using OFDM modulation and operating in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2.4GHz, and backward compatibility with IEEE 802.11b devices, and WEP encryption for security. DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System) - The capability of assigning a fixed host and domain name to a dynamic Internet IP Address. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - A protocol that automatically configure the TCP/IP parameters for the all the PC(s) that are connected to a DHCP server. DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) - A Demilitarized Zone allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special-purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing. DNS (Domain Name System) - An Internet Service that translates the names of websites into IP addresses. Domain Name - A descriptive name for an address or group of addresses on the Internet. DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) - A technology that allows data to be sent or received over existing traditional phone lines. ISP (Internet Service Provider) - A company that provides access to the Internet. MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) - The size in bytes of the largest packet that can be transmitted.
- 129 -
NAT (Network Address Translation) - NAT technology translates IP addresses of a local area Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router network to a different IP address for the Internet. PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) - PPPoE is a protocol for connecting remote hosts to the Internet over an always-on connection by simulating a dial-up connection. SSID - A Service Set Identification is a thirty-two character (maximum) alphanumeric key identifying a wireless local area network. For the wireless devices in a network to communicate with each other, all devices must be configured with the same SSID. This is typically the configuration parameter for a wireless PC card. It corresponds to the ESSID in the wireless Access Point and to the wireless network name. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) - A data privacy mechanism based on a 64-bit or 128-bit or 152-bit shared key algorithm, as described in the IEEE 802.11 standard. Wi-Fi - A trade name for the 802.11b wireless networking standard, given by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA, see http://www.wi-fi.net), an industry standards group promoting interoperability among 802.11b devices. WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) - A group of computers and associated devices communicate with each other wirelessly, which network serving users are limited in a local area.
- 130 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Manual rev 2 | Users Manual | 2.97 MiB |
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router REV1.0.0 1910010809 COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS Specifications are subject to change without notice. is a registered trademark of TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Other brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. No part of the specifications may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative such as translation, transformation, or adaptation without permission from TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Copyright 2013 TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. All rights reserved. http://www.tp-link.com FCC STATEMENT This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/ TV technician for help. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 This device may not cause harmful interference. 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Note: The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the users authority to operate the equipment. Operations in the 5.15-5.25GHz band are restricted to indoor usage only. FCC RF Radiation Exposure Statement:
This equipment complies with FCC RF radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, this grant is applicable to only Mobile Configurations. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. FOR COUNTRY CODE SELECTION USAGE (WLAN DEVICES) Note: The country code selection is for non-US model only and is not available to all US model. Per FCC regulation, all WiFi product marketed in US must fixed to US operation channels only. CE Mark Warning This is a class B product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. National Restrictions This device is intended for home and office use in all EU countries (and other countries following the EU directive 1999/5/EC) without any limitation except for the countries mentioned below:
Country Restriction Reason/remark Bulgaria None General authorization required for outdoor use and public service France Outdoor use limited to 10 mW e.i.r.p. within the band 2454-2483.5 MHz Military Radiolocation use. Refarming of the 2.4 GHz band has been ongoing in recent years to allow current relaxed regulation. Full implementation planned 2012 Italy None If used outside of own premises, general authorization is required Luxembourg None General authorization required for network and service supply(not for spectrum) Norway Implemented This subsection does not apply for the geographical area within a radius of 20 km from the centre of Ny-lesund Russian Federation None Only for indoor applications Note: Please dont use the product outdoors in France. This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed below, and having a maximum gain of 5 dBi. Antennas not included in this list or having a gain greater than 3 dBi are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication. Canadian Compliance Statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1)This device may not cause interference, and
(2)This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet appareil est conforme aux norms CNR exemptes de licence dIndustrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1)cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer dinterfrences et
(2)cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence, y compris celles susceptibles de provoquer un fonctionnement non souhait de lappareil. Industry Canada Statement Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil numrique de la classe B est conforme la norme NMB-003 du Canada. This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. This Class B device meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference-causing equipment regulations. Cet appareil numrique de la Classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Korea Warning Statements
. NCC Notice & BSMI Notice
,
. Safety Information When product has power button, the power button is one of the way to shut off the product;
when there is no power button, the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the product or the power adapter from the power source. Dont disassemble the product, or make repairs yourself. You run the risk of electric shock and voiding the limited warranty. If you need service, please contact us. Avoid water and wet locations. This product can be used in the following countries:
AT ES LT RU BG FI LV SE BY FR MT SK CA GB NL TR CZ GR NO UA DE HU PL DK IE PT EE IT RO TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY For the following equipment:
Product Description: AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Model No.: C7 Trademark: TP-LINK We declare under our own responsibility that the above products satisfy all the technical regulations applicable to the product within the scope of Council Directives:
Directives 1999/5/EC, Directives 2004/108/EC, Directives 2006/95/EC, Directives 1999/519/EC, Directives 2011/65/EU The above product is in conformity with the following standards or other normative documents ETSI EN 300 328 V1.7.1: 2006 ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2:2011& ETSI EN301 489-17 V2.2.1:2012 EN 55022:2010 EN 55024:2010 EN 61000-3-2:2006+A1:2009+A2:2009 EN 61000-3-3:2008 EN 60950-1:2006+A112009+A1:2010+A12:2011 EN 62311:2008 EN 301 893 EN 302 502 The product carries the CE Mark:
Person is responsible for marking this declaration:
Yang Hongliang Product Manager of International Business Date of Issue: 2013 TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. Building 24 (floors 1, 3, 4, 5), and 28 (floors 1-4) Central Science and Technology Park, Shennan Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China CONTENTS Package Contents ..................................................................................................... 1 Introduction ......................................................................................... 2 Chapter 1. 1.1 Overview of the router ................................................................................................ 2 1.2 Conventions ............................................................................................................... 3 1.3 Main Features ............................................................................................................ 3 1.4 Panel Layout .............................................................................................................. 4 1.4.1 The Front Panel .............................................................................................. 4 1.4.2 The Rear Panel .............................................................................................. 5 Chapter 2. Connecting the router ........................................................................ 7 2.1 System Requirements ................................................................................................ 7 2.2 Installation Environment Requirements ...................................................................... 7 2.3 Connecting the router ................................................................................................. 7 Chapter 3. Quick Installation Guide ..................................................................... 9 3.1 TCP/IP Configuration ................................................................................................. 9 3.2 Quick Installation Guide ........................................................................................... 11 Chapter 4. Configuring the router ...................................................................... 20 4.1 Login ........................................................................................................................ 20 4.2 Status ....................................................................................................................... 20 4.3 Quick Setup .............................................................................................................. 22 4.4 Network .................................................................................................................... 22 4.4.1 WAN ............................................................................................................. 22 4.4.2 LAN .............................................................................................................. 31 4.4.3 MAC Clone ................................................................................................... 32 4.5 Dual Band Selection ................................................................................................. 33 4.6 Wireless 2.4GHz ...................................................................................................... 34 4.6.1 Wireless Settings .......................................................................................... 34 4.6.2 WPS ............................................................................................................. 36 4.6.3 Wireless Security .......................................................................................... 39 4.6.4 Wireless MAC Filtering ................................................................................. 42 4.6.5 Wireless Advanced ....................................................................................... 44 4.6.6 Wireless Statistics ......................................................................................... 45 4.7 Wireless 5GHz ......................................................................................................... 46
- I -
4.7.1 Wireless Settings .......................................................................................... 47 4.7.2 WPS ............................................................................................................. 49 4.7.3 Wireless Security .......................................................................................... 51 4.7.4 Wireless MAC Filtering ................................................................................. 55 4.7.5 Wireless Advanced ....................................................................................... 57 4.7.6 Wireless Statistics ......................................................................................... 58 4.8 Guest Network ......................................................................................................... 59 4.8.1 Wireless Settings .......................................................................................... 59 4.8.2 Storage Sharing ............................................................................................ 60 4.9 DHCP ....................................................................................................................... 62 4.9.1 DHCP Settings ............................................................................................. 62 4.9.2 DHCP Clients List ......................................................................................... 63 4.9.3 Address Reservation .................................................................................... 64 4.10 USB Settings ............................................................................................................ 65 4.10.1 Storage Sharing ............................................................................................ 65 4.10.2 FTP Server ................................................................................................... 67 4.10.3 Media Server ................................................................................................ 68 4.10.4 Print Server ................................................................................................... 71 4.10.5 User Accounts .............................................................................................. 71 4.11 NAT .......................................................................................................................... 73 4.12 Forwarding ............................................................................................................... 74 4.12.1 Virtual Servers .............................................................................................. 74 4.12.2 Port Triggering .............................................................................................. 76 4.12.3 DMZ .............................................................................................................. 78 4.12.4 UPnP ............................................................................................................ 79 4.13 Security .................................................................................................................... 80 4.13.1 Basic Security ............................................................................................... 80 4.13.2 Advanced Security ........................................................................................ 81 4.13.3 Local Management ....................................................................................... 83 4.13.4 Remote Management ................................................................................... 84 4.14 Parental Control ....................................................................................................... 85 4.15 Access Control ......................................................................................................... 87 4.15.1 Rule .............................................................................................................. 88 4.15.2 Host .............................................................................................................. 93 4.15.3 Target............................................................................................................ 95 4.15.4 Schedule ....................................................................................................... 97
- II -
4.16 Advanced Routing .................................................................................................... 99 4.16.1 Static Routing List ......................................................................................... 99 4.16.2 System Routing Table ................................................................................. 100 4.17 Bandwidth Control .................................................................................................. 101 4.17.1 Control Settings .......................................................................................... 101 4.17.2 Rules List .................................................................................................... 102 4.18 IP & MAC Binding ................................................................................................... 103 4.18.1 Binding Settings .......................................................................................... 103 4.18.2 ARP List ...................................................................................................... 105 4.19 Dynamic DNS ......................................................................................................... 106 4.19.1 Comexe.cn DDNS ...................................................................................... 106 4.19.2 Dyndns.org DDNS ...................................................................................... 107 4.19.3 No-ip.com DDNS ........................................................................................ 108 4.20 IPv6 Support .......................................................................................................... 108 4.20.1 IPv6 Status ................................................................................................. 109 4.20.2 IPv6 Setup .................................................................................................. 110 4.21 System Tools .......................................................................................................... 115 4.21.1 Time Settings .............................................................................................. 116 4.21.2 Diagnostic ................................................................................................... 117 4.21.3 Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................... 119 4.21.4 Factory Defaults ......................................................................................... 120 4.21.5 Backup & Restore ....................................................................................... 121 4.21.6 Reboot ........................................................................................................ 121 4.21.7 Password .................................................................................................... 122 4.21.8 System Log ................................................................................................. 122 4.21.9 Statistics ..................................................................................................... 124 Appendix A: FAQ .................................................................................................. 127 Appendix B: Configuring the PCs ....................................................................... 132 Appendix C: Specifications ................................................................................. 134 Appendix D: Glossary .......................................................................................... 135
- III -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Package Contents The following items should be found in your package:
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router DC Power Adapter for Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Quick Installation Guide Resource CD for Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router, including:
This Guide Other Helpful Information Note:
Make sure that the package contains the above items. If any of the listed items are damaged or missing, please contact your distributor.
- 1 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Chapter 1. Introduction 1.1 Overview of the router The Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router integrates 4-port Switch, Firewall, NAT-router and Wireless AP. Powered by 3x3 MIMO technology, the AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router delivers exceptional range and speed, which can fully meet the need of Small Office/Home Office (SOHO) networks and the users demanding higher networking performance. Your wireless connections are radio band selectable to avoid interference in your area, and the four built-in Gigabit ports supply high-speed connection to your wired devices. Incredible Speed The Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router provides up to 1750Mbps wireless connection with other wireless clients. The incredible speed makes it ideal for handling multiple data streams at the same time, which ensures your network stable and smooth. The performance of this 802.11ac wireless router will give you the unexpected networking experience at speed much faster than 802.11n. It is also compatible with all IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b and IEEE 802.11g products. Multiple Security Protections With multiple protection measures, including SSID broadcast control and wireless LAN 64/128/152-bit WEP encryption, Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA2- PSK, WPA- PSK), as well as advanced Firewall protections, the Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router provides complete data privacy. Flexible Access Control The Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router provides flexible access control, so that parents or network administrators can establish restricted access policies for children or staff. It also supports Virtual Server and DMZ host for Port Triggering, and then the network administrators can manage and monitor the network in real time with the remote management function. Simple Installation Since the router is compatible with virtually all the major operating systems, it is very easy to manage. Quick Setup Wizard is supported and detailed instructions are provided step by step in this user guide. Before installing the router, please look through this guide to know all the routers functions.
- 2 -
1.2 Conventions Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router The router or Archer C7 mentioned in this guide stands for Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router without any explanation. 1.3 Main Features Complies with IEEE 802.11ac. One 10/100/1000M Auto-Negotiation RJ45 Internet port, four 10/100/1000M Auto-Negotiation RJ45 Ethernet ports, supporting Auto MDI/MDIX. Provides USB ports supporting storage/FTP/Media/Print Server. Provides WPA/WPA2, WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK authentication, TKIP/AES encryption security. Shares data and Internet access for users, supporting Dynamic IP/ Static IP/ PPPoE/ PPTP/
L2TP/ BigPond Internet access. Supports simultaneous 2.4GHz and 5GHz connections for 1750Mbps of total available bandwidth. Supports Virtual Server, Special Application and DMZ host. Supports UPnP, Dynamic DNS, Static Routing. Provides Automatic-connection and Scheduled Connection on certain time to the Internet. Built-in NAT and DHCP server supporting static IP address distributing. Supports Parental Control and Access Control. Connects Internet on demand and disconnects from the Internet when idle for PPPoE. Provides 64/128/152-bit WEP encryption security and wireless LAN ACL (Access Control List). Supports Flow Statistics. Supports IPv6. Supports firmware upgrade and Web management.
- 3 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1.4 Panel Layout 1.4.1 The Front Panel Figure 1-1 LEDs on the front panel The routers LEDs are located on the front panel (View from left to right). Name Status Indication Power is off. Power is on. The router is initializing or maybe has a system error. Off On On Flashing The router is working properly. The router has a system error. The wireless function is disabled. Off Off Flashing The wireless function is enabled. The router is working on 2.4GHz radio band. The wireless function is disabled. Off
(Power)
(System)
(Wireless 2.4GHz)
(Wireless 5GHz) Flashing The wireless function is enabled. The router is working on 5GHz radio band. There is no device linked to the corresponding port. There is a device linked to the corresponding port but there is no activity.
(Ethernet)
(Internet) Off On Flashing There is an active device linked to the corresponding port.
- 4 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router
(WPS)
(USB on the rear panel) Slow Flash On Quick Flash Off On A wireless device is connecting to the network by WPS function. This process will last in the first 2 minutes. A wireless device has been successfully added to the network by WPS function. A wireless device failed to be added to the network by WPS function. No storage device or printer is plugged into the USB port. A storage device or printer has connected to the USB port. Table 1-1 The LEDs Description Note:
1. After a device is successfully added to the network by WPS function, the WPS LED will keep on for about 5 minutes and then turn off. 2. The router is set to working concurrently in 2.4GHz and 5GHz by default. If you desire to choose the working frequency, please go to 4.5 Dual Band Selection. 1.4.2 The Rear Panel Figure 1-2 Rear Panel sketch The following parts are located on the rear panel (View from left to right). Power: The Power socket is where you will connect the power adapter. Please use the power adapter provided with this Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router. On/Off: The switch for the power. Wireless On/Off: The switch for the wireless function. USB: The USB port connects to a USB storage device or a USB printer.
- 5 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Internet: This port is where you will connect the DSL/cable Modem, or Ethernet. Ethernet (1, 2, 3, 4): These ports (1, 2, 3, 4) connect the router to the local PC(s). WPS/Reset:
Pressing this button for less than 5 seconds enables the WPS function. If your client devices, such as wireless adapters, that support Wi-Fi Protected Setup, then you can press this button to quickly establish a connection between the router and client devices and automatically configure wireless security for your wireless network. Pressing this button for more than 5 seconds enables the Reset function. With the router powered on, press and hold the WPS/Reset button (approximately 8 seconds) until the SYS LED becomes quick-flash from slow-flash. And then release the button and wait the router to reboot to its factory default settings. Wireless antenna: To receive and transmit the wireless data.
- 6 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Chapter 2. Connecting the router 2.1 System Requirements Broadband Internet Access Service (DSL/Cable/Ethernet) One DSL/Cable Modem that has an RJ45 connector (which is not necessary if the router is connected directly to the Ethernet) PCs with a working Ethernet Adapter and an Ethernet cable with RJ45 connectors TCP/IP protocol on each PC Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox or Apple Safari 2.2 Installation Environment Requirements Place the router in a well-ventilated place far from any heater or heating vent Avoid direct irradiation of any strong light (such as sunlight) Keep at least 2 inches (5 cm) of clear space around the router Operating Temperature: 0~40 (32~104) Operating Humidity: 10%~90%RH, Non-condensing 2.3 Connecting the router Before installing the router, make sure your PC is connected to the Internet through the broadband service successfully. If there is any problem, please contact your ISP. After that, please install the router according to the following steps. Don't forget to pull out the power plug and keep your hands dry. 1. Power off your modem (if the modem has a backup battery, please remove it too.), and disconnect your existing router if you have one. 2. Connect the Internet port on your Router to the Modems LAN port with an Ethernet cable. 3. Connect your computer to one of the Ethernet ports labeled 1~4 on the Router with an Ethernet cable. 4. Power on the modem and wait for 2 minutes. 5. Make sure the Wireless On/Off switch is ON. Then plug the provided power adapter into the Power jack and the other end to a standard electrical wall socket. Press the On/Off button to
- 7 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router power on the Router. (Before you power on the Router, please make sure your computer is NOT connected to any other wireless network.) Figure 2-1 Hardware Installation Figure 2-2 USB Installation Note:
If you want to use the router to share files or printer, plug the USB storage device to the USB port or connect the printer to the router with a matching cable.
- 8 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Chapter 3. Quick Installation Guide This chapter will show you how to configure the basic functions of your AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router using Quick Setup Wizard within minutes. 3.1 TCP/IP Configuration The default IP address of the router is 192.168.0.1 and the default Subnet Mask is 255.255.255.0. These values can be changed as you desire. In this guide, we use all the default values for description. Connect the local PC to the Ethernet ports of the router and then you can configure the IP address for your PC by the following method: Set up the TCP/IP Protocol in "Obtain an IP address automatically" mode on your PC. If you need instructions as to how to do this, please refer to Appendix B: Configuring the PC. Then the built-in DHCP server will assign IP address for the PC. Now, you can run the Ping command in the command prompt to verify the network connection between your PC and the router. The following example is in Windows XP OS. Open a command prompt, and type ping 192.168.0.1, and then press Enter. If the result displayed is similar to the Figure 3-1, it means the connection between your PC and the router has been established well. Figure 3-1 Success result of Ping command
- 9 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router If the result displayed is similar to Figure 3-2, it means the connection between your PC and the router failed. Figure 3-2 Failure result of Ping command Is the connection between your PC and the router correct?
Please check the connection following these steps:
1. Note:
The 1/2/3/4 LEDs of Ethernet ports which you link to on the router and LEDs on your PC's adapter should be lit. Is the TCP/IP configuration for your PC correct?
2. Note:
If the router's IP address is 192.168.0.1, your PC's IP address must be within the range of 192.168.0.2 ~ 192.168.0.254. Is the default LAN IP of the router correct?
3. Note:
If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192.168.0.x, the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.1.1 to avoid IP conflict. Therefore, in order to verify the network connection between your PC and the router, you can open a command prompt, and type ping 192.168.1.1, and then press Enter.
- 10 -
3.2 Quick Installation Guide Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router With a Web-based utility, it is easy to configure and manage the AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router. The Web-based utility can be used on any Windows, Macintosh or UNIX OS with a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox or Apple Safari. 1. To access the configuration utility, open a web-browser and type in the default IP address http://tplinklogin.net in the address field. Figure 3-3 Log in the router After a moment, a login window will appear, similar to Figure 3-4. Enter admin for the User Name and Password, both in lower case letters. Then click the OK button or press the Enter key. Figure 3-4 Login Windows Note:
If the above screen does not pop up, it means that your Web-browser has been set to a proxy. Go to Tools menu>Internet Options>Connections>LAN Settings, in the screen that appears, cancel the Using Proxy checkbox, and click OK to finish it. 2. After successful login, the Quick Setup page will appear for you to quickly configure your router.
- 11 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 3. Click Next, and then WAN Connection Type page will appear, shown in Figure 3-6. Figure 3-5 Quick Setup Figure 3-6 WAN Connection Type The router provides Auto-Detect function and supports three popular ways PPPoE, Dynamic IP, and Static IP and to connect to the Internet. Its recommended that you make use of the Auto-Detect function. If you are sure of what kind of connection type your ISP provides, you can select the very type and click Next to go on configuring. 4. If you select Auto-Detect, the router will automatically detect the connection type your ISP provides. Make sure the cable is securely plugged into the Internet port before detection. The appropriate configuration page will be displayed when an active Internet service is successfully detected by the router. 1) If the connection type detected is Dynamic IP, no configuration is needed for this step. 2) If the connection type detected is Static IP, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-7. Configure the following parameters and then click Next to continue.
- 12 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 3-7 Quick Setup - Static IP IP Address - This is the WAN IP address as seen by external users on the Internet
(including your ISP). Your ISP will provide you with the IP address you need to enter here. Enter the IP address into the field. Subnet Mask - The Subnet Mask is used for the WAN IP address. Your IPS will provide you with the subnet mask which is usually 255.255.255.0. Default Gateway - Your ISP will provide you with the Gateway address which is the ISP servers address. Enter the gateway IP address into the box if required. Primary DNS - Enter the DNS Server IP address into the box if required. Secondary DNS - Optional If your ISP provides another DNS server, enter it into this field. 3) If the connection type detected is PPPoE/Russian PPPoE, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-8. Configure the following parameters and then click Next to continue. Figure 3-8 Quick Setup PPPoE/Russia PPPoE User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. If you have difficulty with this process, please contact your ISP.
- 13 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Confirm Password - Enter the password again to make sure that the password is correct. Check the radio button of Dynamic/Static IP to activate the secondary connection if your ISP provides an extra Connection type such as Dynamic/Static IP to connect to a local area network. 4) If the connection type detected is L2TP/ Russian L2TP, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-9.Configure the following parameters and then click Next to continue. Figure 3-9 Quick Setup PPTP/Russia PPTP User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. If you have difficulty with this process, please contact your ISP. Select Static IP if IP Address/ Subnet Mask/ Gateway and DNS server address have been provided by your ISP. Then please enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP, and also enter the corresponding parameters. Select Dynamic IP if none of the above parameters are provided. Then you just need to enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP.
- 14 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 5) If the connection type detected is PPTP/Russian PPTP, the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 3-10. Configure the following parameters and then click Next to continue. Figure 3-10 Quick Setup L2TP/Russia L2TP User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. If you have difficulty with this process, please contact your ISP. Select Static IP if IP Address/ Subnet Mask/ Gateway and DNS server address have been provided by your ISP. Then please enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP, and also enter the corresponding parameters. Select Dynamic IP if none of the above parameters are provided. Then you just need to enter server IP address or domain name provided by your ISP. 5. After finishing WAN Connection Type selection, the Dual Band Selection page will appear as shown in Figure 3-11. Here we take Concurrently with 2.4GHz and 5GHz (802.11a/b/g/n) for example. Click Next to continue.
- 15 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 3-11 Quick Setup Dual Band Selection 2.4GHz - You can use the 2.4GHz band to connect to many classic wireless devices like gaming consoles, laptops, DVRs, ect. 5GHz - This band is less crowded and is used for time-sensitive music, video streaming or gaming. Using this band can avoid interference with 2.4GHz networks or noisy devices like cordless phones and microwave ovens. 6. Configure the basic parameters for 2.4GHz wireless network in the following screen as shown in Figure 3-12, and then click Next. Figure 3-12 Quick Setup Wireless Wireless Radio - Displays whether the wireless function is enabled or not. Wireless Network Name - Also called the SSID (Service Set Identification). Enter a value of up to 32 characters. The same name must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network. The default SSID is set to be TP-LINK_2.4GHz_XXXXXX. This value is case-sensitive. For example, TEST is NOT the same as test.
- 16 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Region - Select your region from the drop-down list. This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the router can be used. It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the router in a region other than one of those specified in this field. If your country or region is not listed, please contact your local government agency for assistance. Note:
Limited by local law regulations, version for North America does not have region selection option. Wireless Security Disable Security - The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled. If disabled, the wireless stations will be able to connect the router without encryption. Enable Security (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK) Its selected by default, with the default PSK password the same as the default PIN code. No Change - If you chose this option, wireless security configuration will not change!
The above settings are only for basic wireless parameters. For advanced settings, please check More Advanced Wireless Settings, and then you can set the following parameters. Band - This field displayed the operating frequency being configured. Mode - This field determines the wireless mode which the router works on. 11b only - Select if all of your wireless clients are 802.11b. 11g only - Select if all of your wireless clients are 802.11g. 11n only- Select only if all of your wireless clients are 802.11n. 11bg mixed - Select if you are using both 802.11b and 802.11g wireless clients. 11bgn mixed - Select if you are using a mix of 802.11b, 11g, and 11n wireless clients. Channel Width - Select any channel width from the drop-down list. The default setting is Auto, which can adjust the channel width for your clients automatically.
- 17 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Channel - This field determines which operating frequency will be used. It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point. If you select Auto, then the AP will select the best channel automatically. 7. Configure the basic parameters for 5GHz wireless network in the following screen as shown in Figure 3-13, and then click Next. Figure 3-13 Quick Setup Wireless Wireless Radio - Choose from the drop-down list to enable or disable the wireless radio. Wireless Network Name - Also called the SSID (Service Set Identification). Enter a value of up to 32 characters. The same name must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network. The default SSID is set to be TP-LINK_5GHz_XXXXXX. This value is case-sensitive. For example, TEST is NOT the same as test. Region - Select your region from the drop-down list. This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the router can be used. It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the router in a region other than one of those specified in this field. If your country or region is not listed, please contact your local government agency for assistance. Note:
Limited by local law regulations, version for North America does not have region selection option. Wireless Security
- 18 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Disable Security - The wireless security function can be enabled or disabled. If disabled, the wireless stations will be able to connect the router without encryption. Enable Security (WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK) Its selected by default, with the default PSK password the same as the default PIN code. No Change - If you chose this option, wireless security configuration will not change!
The above settings are only for basic wireless parameters. For advanced settings, please check More Advanced Wireless Settings, and then you can set the following parameters. Band - This field displayed the operating frequency being configured. Mode - This field determines the wireless mode which the router works on. 11an mixed - Select if you are using both 802.11a and 802.11n wireless clients. 11a/n/ac mixed Select if you are using 802.11a, 802.11n and 802.11ac wireless clients. Channel - This field determines which operating frequency will be used. It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point. If you select Auto, then the AP will select the best channel automatically. 8. Click the Finish button to complete the Quick Setup. Figure 3-14 Quick Setup - Finish
- 19 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Chapter 4. Configuring the router This chapter will show each Web page's key functions and the configuration way. 4.1 Login After your successful login, you will see the main menus on the left of the Web-based utility. On the right, there are the corresponding explanations and instructions. The detailed explanations for each Web pages key function are listed below. 4.2 Status The Status page provides the current status information about the router. All information is read-only.
- 20 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-1 Status
- 21 -
4.3 Quick Setup Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Please refer to 3.2 Quick Installation Guide. 4.4 Network Figure 4-2 the Network menu There are three submenus under the Network menu (shown in Figure 4-2): WAN, LAN and MAC Clone. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. 4.4.1 WAN Choose menu Network WAN, you can configure the IP parameters of the WAN on the screen below. 1. If your ISP provides the DHCP service, please choose Dynamic IP type, and the router will automatically get IP parameters from your ISP. You can see the page as follows (Figure 4-3):
Figure 4-3 WAN Dynamic IP
- 22 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router This page displays the WAN IP parameters assigned dynamically by your ISP, including IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, etc. Click the Renew button to renew the IP parameters from your ISP. Click the Release button to release the IP parameters. MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes. It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP. Use These DNS Servers - If your ISP gives you one or two DNS addresses, select Use These DNS Servers and enter the primary and secondary addresses into the correct fields. Otherwise, the DNS servers will be assigned dynamically from your ISP. Note:
If you find error when you go to a website after entering the DNS addresses, it is likely that your DNS servers are set up improperly. You should contact your ISP to get DNS server addresses. Host Name - This option specifies the Host Name of the router. Get IP with Unicast DHCP - A few ISPs' DHCP servers do not support the broadcast applications. If you cannot get the IP Address normally, you can choose this option. (It is rarely required.) Click the Save button to save your settings. 2. If your ISP provides a static or fixed IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway and DNS setting, select Static IP. The Static IP settings page will appear, shown in Figure 4-4. Figure 4-4 WAN - Static IP IP Address - Enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP.
- 23 -
Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet Mask in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP, Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router usually is 255.255.255.0. Default Gateway - (Optional) Enter the gateway IP address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes. It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP. Primary/Secondary DNS - (Optional) Enter one or two DNS addresses in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Click the Save button to save your settings. 3. If your ISP provides a PPPoE connection, select PPPoE/Russia PPPoE option. And you should enter the following parameters (Figure 4-5):
Figure 4-5 WAN - PPPoE User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. Secondary Connection - Its available only for PPPoE Connection. If your ISP provides an extra Connection type such as Dynamic/Static IP to connect to a local area network, then you can check the radio button of Dynamic/Static IP to activate this secondary connection.
- 24 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Disabled - The Secondary Connection is disabled by default, so there is PPPoE connection only. This is recommended. Dynamic IP - You can check this radio button to use Dynamic IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP. Static IP - You can check this radio button to use Static IP as the secondary connection to connect to the local area network provided by ISP. Connect on Demand - In this mode, the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period (Max Idle Time) and be re-established when you attempt to access the Internet again. If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time, please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects. Connect Automatically - The connection can be re-established automatically when it was down. Time-based Connecting - The connection will only be established in the period from the start time to the end time (both are in HH:MM format). Note:
Only when you have configured the system time on System Tools Time Settings page, will the Time-based Connecting function can take effect. Connect Manually - You can click the Connect/Disconnect button to connect/disconnect immediately. This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode. The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically after a specified inactivity period and re-established when you attempt to access the Internet again. Click the Connect button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. Caution: Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background. If you want to do some advanced configurations, please click the Advanced button, and the page shown in Figure 4-6 will then appear:
- 25 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-6 PPPoE Advanced Settings MTU Size - The default MTU size is 1480 bytes, which is usually fine. It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP. Service Name/AC Name - The service name and AC (Access Concentrator) name should not be configured unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP. In most cases, leaving these fields blank will work. ISP Specified IP Address - If your ISP does not automatically assign IP addresses to the router during login, please click Use IP address specified by ISP check box and enter the IP address provided by your ISP in dotted-decimal notation. Detect Online Interval - The router will detect Access Concentrator online at every interval. The default value is 0. You can input the value between 0 and 120. The value 0 means no detect. Primary DNS/Secondary DNS - If your ISP does not automatically assign DNS addresses to the router during login, please click Use the following DNS servers check box and enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation of your ISPs primary DNS server. If a secondary DNS server address is available, enter it as well. Click the Save button to save your settings. 4. If your ISP provides BigPond Cable (or Heart Beat Signal) connection, please select BigPond Cable. And you should enter the following parameters (Figure 4-7):
- 26 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-7 WAN - BigPond Cable User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. Auth Server - Enter the authenticating server IP address or host name. Auth Domain - Type in the domain suffix server name based on your location. e.g. NSW / ACT - nsw.bigpond.net.au VIC / TAS / WA / SA / NT - vic.bigpond.net.au QLD - qld.bigpond.net.au MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes. It is not recommended that you change the default MTU Size unless required by your ISP. Connect on Demand - In this mode, the Internet connection can be terminated automatically after a specified inactivity period (Max Idle Time) and be re-established when you attempt to access the Internet again. If you want your Internet connection keeps active all the time, please enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet access disconnects. Connect Automatically - The connection can be re-established automatically when it was down.
- 27 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Connect Manually - You can click the Connect/Disconnect button to connect/disconnect immediately. This mode also supports the Max Idle Time function as Connect on Demand mode. The Internet connection can be disconnected automatically after a specified inactivity period and re-established when you attempt to access the Internet again. Click the Connect button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. Caution: Sometimes the connection cannot be terminated although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background. Click the Save button to save your settings. 5. If your ISP provides L2TP connection, please select L2TP/Russia L2TP option. And you should enter the following parameters (Figure 4-8):
Figure 4-8 WAN - L2TP/Russia L2TP User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive.
- 28 -
Dynamic IP/ Static IP - Choose either as you are given by your ISP. Click the Connect Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. Connect on Demand - You can configure the router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time). If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity, Connect on Demand enables the router to automatically re-establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. If you wish to activate Connect on Demand, check the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates. Connect Automatically - Connect automatically after the router is disconnected. To use this option, check the radio button. Connect Manually - You can configure the router to make it connect or disconnect manually. After a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time), the router will disconnect from your Internet connection, and you will not be able to re-establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. To use this option, check the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter "0" in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested. Caution: Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time, because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background. Click the Save button to save your settings. 6. If your ISP provides PPTP connection, please select PPTP/Russia PPTP option. And you should enter the following parameters (Figure 4-9):
- 29 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-9 PPTP Settings User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These fields are case-sensitive. Dynamic IP/ Static IP - Choose either as you are given by your ISP and enter the ISPs IP address or the domain name. If you choose static IP and enter the domain name, you should also enter the DNS assigned by your ISP. And click the Save button. Click the Connect button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. Connect on Demand - You can configure the router to disconnect from your Internet connection after a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time). If your Internet connection has been terminated due to inactivity, Connect on Demand enables the router to automatically re-establish your connection as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. If you wish to activate Connect on Demand, check the radio button. If you want your
- 30 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter 0 in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number of minutes you want to have elapsed before your Internet connection terminates. Connect Automatically - Connect automatically after the router is disconnected. To use this option, check the radio button. Connect Manually - You can configure the router to make it connect or disconnect manually. After a specified period of inactivity (Max Idle Time), the router will disconnect from your Internet connection, and you will not be able to re-establish your connection automatically as soon as you attempt to access the Internet again. To use this option, click the radio button. If you want your Internet connection to remain active at all times, enter "0" in the Max Idle Time field. Otherwise, enter the number in minutes that you wish to have the Internet connecting last unless a new link is requested. Caution: Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time because some applications are visiting the Internet continually in the background. Click the Save button to save your settings. Note:
If you don't know how to choose the appropriate connection type, click the Detect button to allow the router to automatically search your Internet connection for servers and protocols. The connection type will be reported when an active Internet service is successfully detected by the router. This report is for your reference only. To make sure the connection type your ISP provides, please refer to the ISP. The various types of Internet connections that the router can detect are as follows:
PPPoE - Connections which use PPPoE that requires a user name and password. Dynamic IP - Connections which use dynamic IP address assignment. Static IP - Connections which use static IP address assignment. The router cannot detect PPTP/L2TP/Big Pond connections with your ISP. If your ISP uses one of these protocols, then you must configure your connection manually. LAN 4.4.2 Choose menu Network LAN, you can configure the IP parameters of the LAN on the screen as below.
- 31 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-10 LAN MAC Address - The physical address of the router, as seen from the LAN. The value can't be changed. IP Address - Enter the IP address of your router or reset it in dotted-decimal notation
(factory default: 192.168.0.1). Subnet Mask - An address code that determines the size of the network. Normally use 255.255.255.0 as the subnet mask. Note:
1) If you change the IP Address of LAN, you must use the new IP Address to log in the router. 2) If the new LAN IP Address you set is not in the same subnet, the IP Address pool of the DHCP server will change accordingly at the same timewhile the Virtual Server and DMZ Host will not take effect until they are re-configured. 4.4.3 MAC Clone Choose menu Network MAC Clone, you can configure the MAC address of the WAN on the screen below, Figure 4-11:
Figure 4-11 MAC Address Clone Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter. Changes are rarely needed here.
- 32 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WAN MAC Address - This field displays the current MAC address of the Internet port. If your ISP requires you to register the MAC address, please enter the correct MAC address into this field in XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX format (X is any hexadecimal digit). Your PC's MAC Address - This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing the router. If the MAC address is required, you can click the Clone MAC Address button and this MAC address will fill in the WAN MAC Address field. Click Restore Factory MAC to restore the MAC address of Internet port to the factory default value. Click the Save button to save your settings. Note:
Only the PC on your LAN can use the MAC Address Clone function. 4.5 Dual Band Selection Choose menu Dual Band Selection, and you can choose the working frequency for your router. It is recommended that your computers and devices running video and voice applications use the 5GHz band, while your guest access and computers that are only browsing the web use the 2.4GHz band. Figure 4-12 Dual Band Selection Concurrently with 2.4GHz and 5GHz (802.11a/b/g/n) - Choose this option, and then the router will work concurrently in 2.4GHz and 5GHz frequency. Only work in 2.4GHz (802.11b/g/n) - Choose this option, and then the router will only work in 2.4GHz frequency. You can use the 2.4GHz band to connect to many classic wireless devices like gaming consoles, laptops, DVRs, ect. Only work in 5GHz (802.11a/n) - Choose this option, and then the router will only work in 5GHz frequency. This band is less crowded and is used for time-sensitive music, video streaming or gaming. Using this band can avoid interference with 2.4GHz networks or noisy devices like cordless phones and microwave ovens.
- 33 -
4.6 Wireless 2.4GHz Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-13 Wireless menu There are six submenus under the Wireless menu (shown in Figure 4-13): Wireless Settings, WPS, Wireless Security, Wireless MAC Filtering, Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.6.1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless Settings, you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network of 2.4GHz on this page. Figure 4-14 Wireless Settings 2.4GHz Wireless Network Name - Also called the SSID (Service Set Identification). Enter a value of up to 32 characters. The same name must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network. Considering your wireless network security, the default SSID is set to be TP-LINK_2.4GHz_XXXXXX. This value is case-sensitive. For example, TEST is NOT the same as test.
- 34 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Region - Select your region from the drop-down list. This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the router can be used. It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the router in a region other than one of those specified in this field. If your country or region is not listed, please contact your local government agency for assistance. When you select your local region from the drop-down list, click the Save button, then the Note Dialog appears. Click OK. Note Dialog Note:
Limited by local law regulations, version for North America does not have region selection option. Mode - Select the desired mode. 11b only - Select if all of your wireless clients are 802.11b. 11g only - Select if all of your wireless clients are 802.11g. When 802.11g mode is selected, only 802.11g wireless stations can connect to the router. 11n only- Select only if all of your wireless clients are 802.11n. When 802.11n mode is selected, only 802.11n wireless stations can connect to the router. 11bg mixed - Select if you are using both 802.11b and 802.11g wireless clients. 11bgn mixed - Select if you are using a mix of 802.11b, 11g, and 11n wireless clients. It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode to 802.11bgn mixed, and all of 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n wireless stations can connect to the router. Channel Width - Select the channel width from the drop-down list. The default setting is automatic, which can adjust the channel width for your clients automatically. Note:
If 11b only, 11g only, or 11bg mixed is selected in the Mode field, the Channel Width selecting field will turn grey and the value will become 20M, which is unable to be changed. Channel - This field determines which operating frequency will be used. The default channel is set to Auto, so the AP will choose the best channel automatically. It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point.
- 35 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Enable SSID Broadcast - When wireless clients survey the local area for wireless networks to associate with, they will detect the SSID broadcast by the router. If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox, the Wireless router will broadcast its name (SSID) on the air. Enable WDS Bridging - Check this box to enable WDS. With this function, the router can bridge two or more WLANs. If this checkbox is selected, you will have to set the following parameters as shown in Figure 4-15. Make sure the following settings are correct. Figure 4-15 WDS Setting SSID (to be bridged) - The SSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client. You can also use the search function to select the SSID to join. MAC Address (to be bridged) - The BSSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client. You can also use the search function to select the BSSID to join. Survey - Click this button, you can search the AP which runs in the current channel. Key type - This option should be chosen according to the AP's security configuration. It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP's security type WEP Index - This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP(ASCII) or WEP(HEX). It indicates the index of the WEP key. Auth Type - This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP(ASCII) or WEP(HEX). It indicates the authorization type of the Root AP. Password - If the AP your router is going to connect needs password, you need to fill the password in this blank. 4.6.2 WPS Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz WPS, you can the screen as shown in Figure 4-16. This section will guide you to add a new wireless device to an existing network quickly by WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) function.
- 36 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WPS Status - Enable or disable the WPS function here. Figure 4-16 WPS Current PIN - The current value of the router's PIN is displayed here. The default PIN of the router can be found in the label or User Guide. Restore PIN - Restore the PIN of the router to its default. Gen New PIN - Click this button, and then you can get a new random value for the router's PIN. You can ensure the network security by generating a new PIN. Disable routers PIN - If this box is checked, and then wireless clients will not be able to connect to the wireless network with PIN code. Add device - You can add a new device to the existing network manually by clicking this button. If the wireless adapter supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can establish a wireless connection between wireless adapter and router using either Push Button Configuration (PBC) method or PIN method. Note:
To build a successful connection by WPS, you should also do the corresponding configuration of the new device for WPS function meanwhile. I. Use the Wi-Fi Protected Setup Button Use this method if your client device has a WPS button. Step 1: Press the WPS/Reset button on the back panel of the router, as shown in Figure 4-17. You can also keep the default WPS status as Enabled and click the Add device button in Figure 4-16. Then choose Press the button of the new device in two minutes and click Connect, shown in Figure 4-18.
- 37 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-17 Step 2: Press and hold the WPS button of the client device. Figure 4-18 Add A New Device Step 3: The Wi-Fi Protected Setup LED flashes for two minutes during the Wi-Fi Protected Setup process. Step 4: When the WPS LED is on, the client device has successfully connected to the router. II. Enter the client devices PIN on the router Use this method if your client device does not have the WPS button, but has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN number. Step 1: Keep the default WPS status as Enabled and click the Add device button in Figure 4-16, then Figure 4-19 will appear. Figure 4-19 Add A New Device Step 2: Enter the PIN number from the client device in the field on the WPS screen above. Then click Connect button. Step 3:
Connect successfully will appear on the screen of Figure 4-19, which means the client device has successfully connected to the router.
- 38 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router III. Enter the routers PIN on your client device Use this method if your client device asks for the routers PIN number. Step 1: On the client device, enter the PIN number listed on the routers Wi-Fi Protected Setup screen, shown in Figure 4-16 (It is also labeled on the bottom of the router). Step 2: The Wi-Fi Protected Setup LED flashes for two minutes during the Wi-Fi Protected Setup process. Step 3: When the WPS LED is on, the client device has successfully connected to the router. Note:
1) The WPS LED on the router will light green for five minutes if the device has been successfully added to the network. 2) The WPS function cannot be configured if the Wireless Function of the router is disabled. Please make sure the Wireless Function is enabled before configuring the WPS. 4.6.3 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless Security, you can configure the security settings of your wireless network. There are five wireless security modes supported by the router:
WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, and WEP. Figure 4-20 Wireless Security
- 39 -
Disable Security - If you do not want to use wireless security, check this radio button. But its Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security. WPA/WPA2-Personal - Its the WPA/WPA2 authentication type based on pre-shared passphrase. The router is configured by this security type by default. Version - you can choose the version of the WPA-PSK security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select WPA-PSK (Pre-shared key of WPA) or WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared key of WPA) automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. Encryption - When WPA-PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type, you can select either Automatic, or TKIP or AES as Encryption. Note:
If you check the WPA/WPA2-Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption, you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4-21. Figure 4-21 WPA/WPA2 Personal PSK Password - You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 characters or 8 to 64 Hexadecimal characters. The default password is the same with the default PIN code, which is labeled on the bottom of the router or can be found in Figure 4-16. Group Key Update Period - Specify the group key update interval in seconds. The value should be 30 or above. Enter 0 to disable the update. WPA/WPA2- Enterprise - Its based on Radius Server. Version - you can choose the version of the WPA security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) or WPA2
(WPA version 2) automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. Encryption - You can select either Automatic, or TKIP or AES. Note:
If you check the WPA/WPA2-Enterprise radio button and choose TKIP encryption, you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4-22.
- 40 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-22 WPA/WPA2 - Enterprise Radius Server IP - Enter the IP address of the Radius server. Radius Port - Enter the port number of the Radius server. Radius Password - Enter the password for the Radius server. Group Key Update Period - Specify the group key update interval in seconds. The value should be 30 or above. Enter 0 to disable the update. WEP - It is based on the IEEE 802.11 standard. If you check this radio button, you will find a notice in red as show in Figure 4-23. Figure 4-23 WEP Type - you can choose the type for the WEP security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. WEP Key Format - Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here. Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits (0-9, a-f, A-F) in the specified length. ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length. WEP Key - Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create. Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network.
- 41 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Key Type - You can select the WEP key length (64-bit, or 128-bit, or 152-bit.) for encryption. "Disabled" means this WEP key entry is invalid. 64-bit - You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, zero key is not promoted) or 5 ASCII characters. 128-bit - You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, zero key is not promoted) or 13 ASCII characters. 152-bit - You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, zero key is not promoted) or 16 ASCII characters. Note:
If you do not set the key, the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type. Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page. 4.6.4 Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless MAC Filtering, you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function, shown in Figure 4-24. Figure 4-24 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address, click Enable. The default setting is Disabled. MAC Address - The wireless station's MAC address that you want to filter. Status - The status of this entry, either Enabled or Disabled. Description - A simple description of the wireless station. To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry, click the Add New button. The "Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry" page will appear, shown in Figure 4-25:
- 42 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-25 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field. The format of the MAC is any hexadecimal digit). For example:
is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
(X Address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B. 2. Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field. For example:
Wireless station A. 3. Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop-down list. 4. Click the Save button to save this entry. To modify or delete an existing entry:
1. Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify. If you want to delete the entry, click the Delete. 2. Modify the information. 3. Click the Save button. Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. Click the Next button to go to the next page. Click the Previous button to return to the previous page. For example: If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00-0A-EB-00-07-5F are able to access the router, but all the other wireless stations cannot access the router, you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps:
1. Click the Enable button to enable this function.
- 43 -
2. Select the radio button Allow the entries specified by any enabled entries in the list to Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router access for Filtering Rules. 3. Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already. 4. Click the Add New... button. 1) Enter the MAC address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B/00-0A-EB-00-07-5F in the MAC Address field. 2) Enter wireless station A/B in the Description field. 3) Select Enabled in the Status drop-down list. 4) Click the Save button. 5) Click the Back button. The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list:
4.6.5 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless Advanced, you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network. Figure 4-26 Wireless Advanced Transmit Power - Here you can specify the transmit power of router. You can select High, Middle or Low which you would like. High is the default setting and is recommended.
- 44 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Beacon Interval - Enter a value between 20-1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here. The beacons are the packets sent by the router to synchronize a wireless network. Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons. The default value is 100. RTS Threshold - Here you can specify the RTS (Request to Send) Threshold. If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size, the router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame. The default value is 2346. Fragmentation Threshold - This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented. Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets. 2346 is recommended. the default setting and is DTIM Interval - This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message
(DTIM). A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages. When the router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients, it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value. You can specify the value between 1-15 Beacon Intervals. The default value is 1, which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval. Enable WMM - WMM function can guarantee the packets with high-priority messages being transmitted preferentially. It is strongly recommended. Enable Short GI - This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time. Enabled AP Isolation - This function can isolate wireless stations on your network from each other. Wireless devices will be able to communicate with the router but not with each other. To use this function, check this box. AP Isolation is disabled by default. Note:
If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page, it's strongly recommended to keep the provided default values; otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance. 4.6.6 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless 2.4GHz Wireless Statistics, you can see the MAC Address, Current Status, Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station.
- 45 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router MAC Address - The connected wireless station's MAC address Figure 4-27 Wireless Statistics Current Status - The connected wireless station's running status, one of STA-AUTH/
STA-ASSOC/ STA-JOINED/ WPA/ WPA-PSK/ WPA2/ WPA2-PSK/ AP-UP/ AP-DOWN/
Disconnected Received Packets - Packets received by the station Sent Packets - Packets sent by the station You cannot change any of the values on this page. To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations, click on the Refresh button. If the numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page, click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page. Note:
This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds. 4.7 Wireless 5GHz Figure 4-28 Wireless menu There are six submenus under the Wireless menu (shown in Figure 4-13): Wireless Settings, WPS, Wireless Security, Wireless MAC Filtering, Wireless Advanced and Wireless Statistics. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions.
- 46 -
4.7.1 Wireless Settings Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu Wireless 5GHz Wireless Settings, you can configure the basic settings for the wireless network of 5GHz on this page. Figure 4-29 Wireless Settings 5GHz Wireless Network Name - Also called the SSID (Service Set Identification). Enter a value of up to 32 characters. The same name must be assigned to all wireless devices in your network. Considering your wireless network security, the default SSID is set to be TP-LINK_5GHz_XXXXXX. This value is case-sensitive. For example, TEST is NOT the same as test. Region - Select your region from the drop-down list. This field specifies the region where the wireless function of the router can be used. It may be illegal to use the wireless function of the router in a region other than one of those specified in this field. If your country or region is not listed, please contact your local government agency for assistance. When you select your local region from the drop-down list, click the Save button, then the Note Dialog appears. Click OK. Note Dialog Note:
Limited by local law regulations, version for North America does not have region selection option.
- 47 -
Mode - Select the desired mode. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 11a only - Select if all of your wireless clients are 802.11a. When 802.11a mode is selected, only 802.11a wireless stations can connect to the router. 11n only- Select only if all of your wireless clients are 802.11n. When 802.11n mode is selected, only 802.11n wireless stations can connect to the router. 11an mixed - Select if you are using both 802.11a and 802.11n wireless clients. It is strongly recommended that you set the Mode 11an mixed, and all of 802.11a and 802.11n wireless stations can connect to the router. Channel - This field determines which operating frequency will be used. The default channel is set to Auto, so the router will choose the best channel automatically. It is not necessary to change the wireless channel unless you notice interference problems with another nearby access point. Enable SSID Broadcast - When wireless clients survey the local area for wireless networks to associate with, they will detect the SSID broadcast by the router. If you select the Enable SSID Broadcast checkbox, the Wireless router will broadcast its name (SSID) on the air. Enable WDS Bridging - Check this box to enable WDS. With this function, the router can bridge two or more WLANs. If this checkbox is selected, you will have to set the following parameters as shown in Figure 4-30. Make sure the following settings are correct. Figure 4-30 SSID (to be bridged) - The SSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client. You can also use the search function to select the SSID to join. MAC Address (to be bridged) - The BSSID of the AP your router is going to connect to as a client. You can also use the search function to select the BSSID to join. Survey - Click this button, you can search the AP which runs in the current channel. Key type - This option should be chosen according to the AP's security configuration. It is recommended that the security type is the same as your AP's security type
- 48 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router WEP Index - This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP(ASCII) or WEP(HEX).It indicates the index of the WEP key. Auth Type - This option should be chosen if the key type is WEP(ASCII) or WEP(HEX).It indicates the authorization type of the Root AP. Password - If the AP your router is going to connect needs password, you need to fill the password in this blank. 4.7.2 WPS Choose menu Wireless 5GHz WPS, you can the screen as shown in Figure 4-31. This section will guide you to add a new wireless device to an existing network quickly by WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) function. WPS Status - Enable or disable the WPS function here. Figure 4-31 WPS Current PIN - The current value of the router's PIN is displayed here. The default PIN of the router can be found in the label or User Guide. Restore PIN - Restore the PIN of the router to its default. Gen New PIN - Click this button, and then you can get a new random value for the router's PIN. You can ensure the network security by generating a new PIN. Add device - You can add a new device to the existing network manually by clicking this button. If the wireless adapter supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), you can establish a wireless connection between wireless adapter and router using either Push Button Configuration (PBC) method or PIN method. Note:
To build a successful connection by WPS, you should also do the corresponding configuration of the new device for WPS function meanwhile.
- 49 -
I. Use the Wi-Fi Protected Setup Button Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Use this method if your client device has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup button. Step 1: Press the WPS/Reset button on the back panel of the router, as shown in Figure 4-32. You can also keep the default WPS status as Enabled and click the Add device button in Figure 4-31. Then choose Press the button of the new device in two minutes and click Connect, shown in Figure 4-33. Figure 4-32 Figure 4-33 Add A New Device Step 2: Press and hold the WPS button of the client device directly. Step 3: The Wi-Fi Protected Setup LED flashes for two minutes during the Wi-Fi Protected Setup process. Step 4: When the WPS LED is on, the client device has successfully connected to the router. II. Enter the client devices PIN on the router Use this method if your client device does not have the WPS button, but has a Wi-Fi Protected Setup PIN number. Step 1: Keep the default WPS status as Enabled and click the Add device button in Figure 4-31, then Figure 4-34 will appear. Figure 4-34 Add A New Device
- 50 -
Step 2: Enter the PIN number from the client device in the field on the above WPS screen. Then Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router click Connect button. Step 3: Connect successfully will appear on the screen of Figure 4-34, which means the client device has successfully connected to the router. III. Enter the routers PIN on your client device Use this method if your client device asks for the routers PIN number. Step 1: On the client device, enter the PIN number listed on the routers Wi-Fi Protected Setup screen, shown in Figure 4-31 (It is also labeled on the bottom of the router). Step 2: The Wi-Fi Protected Setup LED flashes for two minutes during the Wi-Fi Protected Setup process. Step 3: When the WPS LED is on, the client device has successfully connected to the router. Note:
1) The WPS LED on the router will light green for five minutes if the device has been successfully added to the network. 2) The WPS function cannot be configured if the Wireless Function of the router is disabled. Please make sure the Wireless Function is enabled before configuring the WPS. 4.7.3 Wireless Security Choose menu Wireless 5GHz Wireless Security, you can configure the security settings of your wireless network. There are five wireless security modes supported by the router: WPA-Personal, WPA2-Personal, WPA-Enterprise, WPA2-Enterprise, and WEP.
- 51 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-35 Wireless Security Disable Security - If you do not want to use wireless security, check this radio button. But its strongly recommended to choose one of the following modes to enable security. WPA/WPA2-Personal - Its the WPA/WPA2 authentication type based on pre-shared passphrase. The router is configured by this security type by default. Version - you can choose the version of the WPA-PSK security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select WPA-PSK (Pre-shared key of WPA) or WPA2-PSK (Pre-shared key of WPA) automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. Encryption - When WPA-PSK or WPA is set as the Authentication Type, you can select either Automatic, or TKIP or AES as Encryption. Note:
If you check the WPA/WPA2-Personal radio button and choose TKIP encryption, you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4-36.
- 52 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-36 WPA/WPA2 Personal PSK Password - You can enter ASCII characters between 8 and 63 characters or 8 to 64 Hexadecimal characters. The default password is the same with the default PIN code, which is labeled on the bottom of the router or can be found in Figure 4-31. Group Key Update Period - Specify the group key update interval in seconds. The value should be 30 or above. Enter 0 to disable the update. WPA /WPA2- Enterprise - Its based on Radius Server. Version - you can choose the version of the WPA security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) or WPA2
(WPA version 2) automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. Encryption - You can select either Automatic, or TKIP or AES. Note:
If you check the WPA/WPA2-Enterprise radio button and choose TKIP encryption, you will find a notice in red as shown in Figure 4-37. Figure 4-37 WPA/WPA2 - Enterprise Radius Server IP - Enter the IP address of the Radius server. Radius Port - Enter the port number of the Radius server. Radius Password - Enter the password for the Radius server. Group Key Update Period - Specify the group key update interval in seconds. The value should be 30 or above. Enter 0 to disable the update.
- 53 -
WEP - It is based on the IEEE 802.11 standard. If you check this radio button, you will find a Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router notice in red as show in Figure 4-38. Figure 4-38 WEP Type - you can choose the type for the WEP security on the drop-down list. The default setting is Automatic, which can select Shared Key or Open System authentication type automatically based on the wireless station's capability and request. WEP Key Format - Hexadecimal and ASCII formats are provided here. Hexadecimal format stands for any combination of hexadecimal digits (0-9, a-f, A-F) in the specified length. ASCII format stands for any combination of keyboard characters in the specified length. WEP Key - Select which of the four keys will be used and enter the matching WEP key that you create. Make sure these values are identical on all wireless stations in your network. Key Type - You can select the WEP key length (64-bit, or 128-bit, or 152-bit.) for encryption. "Disabled" means this WEP key entry is invalid. 64-bit - You can enter 10 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, zero key is not promoted) or 5 ASCII characters. 128-bit - You can enter 26 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, zero key is not promoted) or 13 ASCII characters. 152-bit - You can enter 32 hexadecimal digits (any combination of 0-9, a-f, A-F, zero key is not promoted) or 16 ASCII characters. Note:
If you do not set the key, the wireless security function is still disabled even if you have selected Shared Key as Authentication Type. Be sure to click the Save button to save your settings on this page.
- 54 -
4.7.4 Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Wireless MAC Filtering Choose menu Wireless MAC Filtering, you can control the wireless access by configuring the Wireless MAC Filtering function, shown in Figure 4-24. Figure 4-39 Wireless MAC Filtering To filter wireless users by MAC Address, click Enable. The default setting is Disabled. MAC Address - The wireless station's MAC address that you want to filter. Status - The status of this entry, either Enabled or Disabled. Description - A simple description of the wireless station. To Add a Wireless MAC Address filtering entry, click the Add New button. The "Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry" page will appear, shown in Figure 4-25:
Figure 4-40 Add or Modify Wireless MAC Address Filtering entry To add or modify a MAC Address Filtering entry, follow these instructions:
- 55 -
1. Enter the appropriate MAC Address into the MAC Address field. The format of the MAC is any hexadecimal digit). For example:
is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router
(X Address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B. 2. Give a simple description for the wireless station in the Description field. For example:
Wireless station A. 3. Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop-down list. 4. Click the Save button to save this entry. To modify or delete an existing entry:
1. Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify. If you want to delete the entry, click the Delete. 2. Modify the information. 3. Click the Save button. Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. Click the Next button to go to the next page. Click the Previous button to return to the previous page. For example: If you desire that the wireless station A with MAC address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B and the wireless station B with MAC address 00-0A-EB-00-07-5F are able to access the router, but all the other wireless stations cannot access the router, you can configure the Wireless MAC Address Filtering list by following these steps:
1. Click the Enable button to enable this function. 2. Select the radio button Allow the entries specified by any enabled entries in the list to access for Filtering Rules. 3. Delete all or disable all entries if there are any entries already. 4. Click the Add New... button. 5. Enter the MAC address 00-0A-EB-B0-00-0B/00-0A-EB-00-07-5F in the MAC Address field. 6. Enter wireless station A/B in the Description field. 7. Select Enabled in the Status drop-down list. 8. Click the Save button. 9. Click the Back button. The filtering rules that configured should be similar to the following list:
- 56 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4.7.5 Wireless Advanced Choose menu Wireless Wireless Advanced, you can configure the advanced settings of your wireless network. Figure 4-41 Wireless Advanced Transmit Power - Here you can specify the transmit power of router. You can select High, Middle or Low which you would like. High is the default setting and is recommended. Beacon Interval - Enter a value between 20-1000 milliseconds for Beacon Interval here. The beacons are the packets sent by the router to synchronize a wireless network. Beacon Interval value determines the time interval of the beacons. The default value is 100. RTS Threshold - Here you can specify the RTS (Request to Send) Threshold. If the packet is larger than the specified RTS Threshold size, the router will send RTS frames to a particular receiving station and negotiate the sending of a data frame. The default value is 2346. Fragmentation Threshold - This value is the maximum size determining whether packets will be fragmented. Setting the Fragmentation Threshold too low may result in poor network performance because of excessive packets. 2346 is recommended. the default setting and is DTIM Interval - This value determines the interval of the Delivery Traffic Indication Message
- 57 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router
(DTIM). A DTIM field is a countdown field informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages. When the router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients, it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value. You can specify the value between 1-15 Beacon Intervals. The default value is 1, which indicates the DTIM Interval is the same as Beacon Interval. Enable WMM - WMM function can guarantee the packets with high-priority messages being transmitted preferentially. It is strongly recommended. Enable Short GI - This function is recommended for it will increase the data capacity by reducing the guard interval time. Enabled AP Isolation - This function can isolate wireless stations on your network from each other. Wireless devices will be able to communicate with the router but not with each other. To use this function, check this box. AP Isolation is disabled by default. Note:
If you are not familiar with the setting items in this page, it's strongly recommended to keep the provided default values; otherwise it may result in lower wireless network performance. 4.7.6 Wireless Statistics Choose menu Wireless Wireless Statistics, you can see the MAC Address, Current Status, Received Packets and Sent Packets for each connected wireless station. Figure 4-42 Wireless Statistics MAC Address - The connected wireless station's MAC address Current Status - The connected wireless station's running status, one of STA-AUTH/
STA-ASSOC/ STA-JOINED/ WPA/ WPA-PSK/ WPA2/ WPA2-PSK/ AP-UP/ AP-DOWN/
Disconnected Received Packets - Packets received by the station Sent Packets - Packets sent by the station You cannot change any of the values on this page. To update this page and to show the current connected wireless stations, click on the Refresh button. If the numbers of connected wireless stations go beyond one page, click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return the previous page.
- 58 -
Note:
This page will be refreshed automatically every 5 seconds. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4.8 Guest Network Figure 4-43 The Guest Network menu There are two submenus under the Guest Network menu (shown in Figure 4-43): Wireless Settings and Storage Sharing. Click either of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.8.1 Wireless Settings Choose menu Guest Network Wireless Settings, you can configure the Guest Network Wireless Settings on the page as shown in Figure 4-44. Figure 4-44 Guest Network Wireless Settings
- 59 -
Allow Guest To Access My Local Network - If enabled, guests can communicate with Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router hosts. Enable Guest Network Bandwidth Control - If enabled, the Guest Network Bandwidth Control rules will take effect. Egress Bandwidth For Guest Network - The upload speed through the WAN port for Guest Network. Ingress Bandwidth For Guest Network - The download speed through the WAN port for Guest Network. Guest Network (2.4G/5G) - Enabled or disable the Guest Network function here. Network Name - Enter a value of up to 32 characters. The same Name (SSID) must be assigned to all wireless devices in your Guest Network. Wireless Security - You can configure the security of Guest Network here. Access Time - During this time the wireless stations could accessing the AP. Note:
The range of bandwidth for Guest Network is calculated according to the setting of Bandwidth Control on the page Bandwidth Control->Control Settings. 4.8.2 Storage Sharing Choose menu Guest Network Storage Sharing, you can configure the Guest Network Storage Sharing on the page as shown in Figure 4-45. When a share folder is added, you can view its display name, volume partition, folder path and you can delete the share folder by clicking the Delete button. Figure 4-45 Guest Network Storage Sharing User Name - The user name is guest for Guest Network, which can't be changed. Password - Enter the password in the Password field. The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length.
- 60 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Confirm Password - Re-enter the password here. Storage Authority - Authority of user: Read Only or Read and Write. Name - This folder's display name. Partition - The volume that the folder resides. Volume 1-8 is mapping to USB port 1, Volume 9-16 is mapping to USB port 2. Folder - The real full path of the specified folder. You can edit the share folder by clicking Edit. You can delete the share folder by clicking Delete. Follow the instructions below to set up your Guest Network Storage Sharing:
1. Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this Router. 2. Make sure the Service Status on the page USB Settings -> Storage Sharing is Started. 3. Make sure the Access shared storage with password on the page USB Settings -> Storage Sharing is Enabled. 4. Click the Start button to start the Guest Network Storage Sharing. 5. Click the Add New Folder to Share button to specify a folder to share for the guests. There is one default user account that can access the Guest Network Storage Sharing. Clicking Modify on Figure 4-45, there will pop up Figure 4-46, where you can change the password and storage authority of the account. Figure 4-46 Modify User Account of Guest Network Note:
1. If you want guests visit folders of Guest Network Storage Sharing with guest account, you must enable Access shared storage with password on the page USB Settings -> Storage Sharing, or the guests can't access to the Guest Network Storage Sharing. 2. The max share folders number is 6. If you want to share a new folder when the number has reached 6, you can delete a share folder and then add a new one.
- 61 -
4.9 DHCP Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-47 The DHCP menu There are three submenus under the DHCP menu (shown in Figure 4-47): DHCP Settings, DHCP Clients List and Address Reservation. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.9.1 DHCP Settings Choose menu DHCP DHCP Settings, you can configure the DHCP Server on the page as shown in Figure 4-48.The router is set up by default as a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server, which provides the TCP/IP configuration for all the PC(s) that are connected to the router on the LAN. Figure 4-48 DHCP Settings DHCP Server - Enable or Disable the DHCP server. If you disable the Server, you must have another DHCP server within your network or else you must configure the computer manually. Start IP Address - Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to start with when assigning IP addresses. 192.168.0.100 is the default start address. End IP Address - Specify an IP address for the DHCP Server to end with when assigning IP addresses. 192.168.0.199 is the default end address.
- 62 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Address Lease Time - The Address Lease Time is the amount of time a network user will be allowed connection to the router with their current dynamic IP Address. Enter the amount of time in minutes and the user will be "leased" this dynamic IP Address. After the time is up, the user will be automatically assigned a new dynamic IP address. The range of the time is 1
~ 2880 minutes. The default value is 120 minutes. Default Gateway - (Optional.) It is suggested to input the IP address of the Ethernet port of the router. The default value is 192.168.0.1. Default Domain - (Optional) Input the domain name of your network. Primary DNS - (Optional) Input the DNS IP address provided by your ISP or consult your ISP. Secondary DNS - (Optional.) Input the IP address of another DNS server if your ISP provides two DNS servers. Note:
To use the DHCP server function of the router, you must configure all computers on the LAN as
"Obtain an IP Address automatically". 4.9.2 DHCP Clients List Choose menu DHCP DHCP Clients List, you can view the information about the clients attached to the router in the screen as shown in Figure 4-49. Figure 4-49 DHCP Clients List Client Name - The name of the DHCP client MAC Address - The MAC address of the DHCP client Assigned IP - The IP address that the router has allocated to the DHCP client Lease Time - The time of the DHCP client leased. After the dynamic IP address has expired, a new dynamic IP address will be automatically assigned to the user. You cannot change any of the values on this page. To update this page and to show the current attached devices, click the Refresh button.
- 63 -
4.9.3 Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Address Reservation Choose menu DHCP Address Reservation, you can view and add a reserved address for clients via the next screen (shown in Figure 4-50). When you specify a reserved IP address for a PC on the LAN, that PC will always receive the same IP address each time when it accesses the DHCP server. Reserved IP addresses should be assigned to the servers that require permanent IP settings. Figure 4-50 Address Reservation MAC Address - The MAC address of the PC for which you want to reserve an IP address. Reserved IP Address - The IP address reserved for the PC by the router. Status - The status of this entry, either Enabled or Disabled. To Reserve an IP address:
1. Click the Add New button. Then Figure 4-51 will pop up. 2. Enter the MAC address (in XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX format.) and IP address (in dotted-decimal notation) of the computer for which you want to reserve an IP address. 3. Click the Save button. Figure 4-51 Add or Modify an Address Reservation Entry To modify or delete an existing entry:
- 64 -
1. Click the Modify in the entry you want to modify. If you want to delete the entry, click the Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Delete. 2. Modify the information. 3. Click the Save button. Click the Enable/Disable All button to make all entries enabled/disabled Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. Click the Next button to go to the next page and Click the Previous button to return the previous page. 4.10 USB Settings Figure 4-52 The USB Settings menu There are five submenus under the USB Settings menu (shown in Figure 4-52):Storage Sharing, FTP Server, Media Server, Print Server and User Accounts. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.10.1 Storage Sharing Choose menu USB SettingsStorage Sharing, you can configure a USB disk drive attached to the router and view volume and share such properties as share name, capacity, used space, and free space on this page as shown below. Figure 4-53 Storage Sharing
- 65 -
Service Status - Indicates the Network Sharing service's current status. You can click the Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Start button to start the Storage Sharing service and click the Stop button to stop it. Volume - The volume name of the USB drive the users have access to. Volume 1-8 is mapping to USB port1, and Volume 9-16 is mapping to USB port2. Capacity - The storage capacity of the USB driver. Used - The used space of the USB driver. Free - The available space of the USB driver. Use% - The percentage of the used space. Shared - Indicates the shared or non-shared status of the volume. When the volume is shared, you can click the Disable to stop sharing the volume; when volume is non-shared, you can click the Enable button to share the volume. Click the Start button to start the Network Sharing service. Click the Stop button to stop the Network Sharing service. Click the Eject Disk button to safely remove the USB storage device that is connected to USB port. This takes the drive offline. A message (as shown in Figure 4-54) will appear on your web browser when it is safe to detach the USB disk. Figure 4-54 Safe Unplug Message Click the Rescan button to start a new scan. Follow the instructions below to set up your router as a file server:
1. Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router. 2. Click the Rescan button to find the USB drive that has been attached to the router. 3. Click the Start button to start the Storage Sharing service. 4. Click the Enable button under Shared to enable the disk to share. 5. Click the Open the disk to visit the sharing disk. Note:
1. The router can automatically locate new USB drive. But to display the information about your USB device, you need to click the Rescan button manually.
- 66 -
2. The new settings will not take effect until you restart the service. 3. To unplug the USB drive, click Eject Disk button first. Simply pulling USB drive out of the Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router USB port can cause damage to the device and loss of data. 4. Mounted volumes of each USB port are subject to the 8-volume limit. So you cannot access 5. more than 8 volumes on the USB storage device. If you change the storage settings during the storage connection is established, then the changes will not take effect until the router or the client is rebooted. 4.10.2 FTP Server Choose menu USB SettingsFTP Server, you can create an FTP server that can be accessed from the Internet or your local network. Service Status - Indicates the FTP Server's current status. Figure 4-55 FTP Server Configuration Internet Access - Select enable to allow access of the FTP server from the Internet. Otherwise, select disable to only allow local network access. Service Port - Enter the FTP Port number to use. The default is 21. Name - This folder's display name. Partition - The volume that the folder resides. Volume 1-8 is mapping to USB port1, and Volume 9-16 is mapping to USB port2. Folder - The real full path of the specified folder. To set up your FTP Server, please follow the instructions below:
1. Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router. 2. Click the Enable/Disable radio box to enable/disable Internet access to FTP from Internet port.
- 67 -
3. Specify a port for the FTP server to use (The default port number is 21). Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4. The Internet Address displays the WAN IP address of this router, so that other users can access FTP via this address. 5. If WAN type is PPPoE/PPTP/L2TP, two connections will be available. Therefore, users can access FTP server via two connections. Users in a private LAN can access ftp server via Public Address while Internet users can access ftp server via Internet Address. 6. Click the Start button to start the ftp server. To add a new folder, follow the instructions below. 1. Click Add New Folder in Figure 4-55. Figure 4-56 Add or Modify Share Folder 2. Select the Share entire partition or a specific folder option. 3. Enter display name of the share folder in Display Name filed. 4. Click the Save button to save the settings. You can click the upper button to go to the upper folder. You can click the Back button to return to the ftp server configuration page. Note:
1. The max share folders number is 10. If you want to share a new folder when the number has 2. reached 10, you can delete an existing share folder and then add a new one. If you want to change the FTP settings, you need to restart FTP Server to make the changes take effect. 4.10.3 Media Server Choose menu USB SettingsMedia Server, you can create media server that allows you to share stored content with other computers and devices on your home network and on the Internet.
- 68 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-57 Media Server Setting Server Name - The name of this Media Server. Server Status - Indicates the Media Servers current status, started or stopped. You can click the Start button to start the Media Server and click the Stop button to stop it. Name - The display name of this folder. File System - The file system type on the partition can be FAT32 or NTFS. Folder - The real full path of the specified folder. Delete - You can delete the share folder by click Delete. To set up your media server, please follow the instructions below:
1. Plug an external USB hard disk drive or USB flash drive into this router, and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-58. Figure 4-58 Media Server Setting 2. Click the Start button to start the media server, and then the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-59.
- 69 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-59 Media Server Setting 3. Click the Add share folder button to specify a folder as the search path of media server. The screen will then appear as shown in Figure 4-60. Figure 4-60 Add New Folder Display Name - You can enter a display name for the share folder. Share entire partition - Choose this option and then the folders contained in this partition will all be shared. Folder Location- Displays the location of this folder. Select - Check the radio button to select the folder to share. Folder - Displays folders that are in current path. Upper - Click this button to get into the upper folder. Save - Click this button to save your settings and the page will be redirected to the media server configuration page.
- 70 -
Back - Click this button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router page. 4. Click the Scan All button to scan all the share folders immediately. You can also select the Auto-scan, at same time, select an auto scan interval time by drop-down list. In this case, the media server will auto scan the share folders. Note:
The max share folders number is 6. If you want share a new folder when the number has been reached to be 6, you can delete a share folder and then add a new one. 4.10.4 Print Server Choose menu USB SettingsPrint Server, you can configure print server on this page as shown below. There are two states of the print server, they are as follows:
Figure 4-61 Pint Server Setting Online - Indicates the print service has been turned on, and no user is using the print service at present. You can click the "Stop" button to stop the print service. Offline - Indicates the print service feature is disabled. You can click "Start" button to start the print service. 4.10.5 User Accounts You can specify the user name and password for Storage Sharing and FTP Server users on this page. Storage Sharing users can use Internet Explorer to access files on the USB drive. FTP Server users can log into the FTP Server via FTP Client. There are two default user accounts that can access the Storage Sharing and FTP Server. They are Administrator and Guest (as shown in Figure 4-62). Administrator has read/write access to Storage Sharing and can access FTP Server while Guest has read-only access to Storage Sharing and cannot access FTP Server.
- 71 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-62 User Account Management Only Administrator can use a Web browser to transfer the files from a PC to the Writable shared volume on the USB drive. To add a new user account, please follow the steps below:
1. Click Add New User button, and the screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-63. 2. Self-define a User Name. 3. Enter the password in the Password field. 4. Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field. 5. Choose the Storage Authority from the drop-down list, Read and Write or Read Only. 6. Choose FTP Access from the drop-down list, Yes or No. Figure 4-63 Add or Modify User Account
- 72 -
User Name - Type the user name that you want to give access to the USB drive. The user Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router name must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length. Password - Enter the password in the Password field. The password must be composed of alphanumeric symbols not exceeding 15 characters in length. For security purposes, the password for each user account is not displayed. Confirm Password - Re-enter the password here. Storage Authority Choose Read and Write or Read Only from the drop-down list to assign access authority of Storage Sharing to the user. FTP Access Choose Yes or No from the drop-down list to decide whether the user can access FTP Server or not. Save - You can click the SAVE button to save your settings. Back - You can click the Back button to discard the settings and just go to the media server configuration page. Note:
1. Please restart the service for the new settings to take effect. 2. If you cannot use the new user name and password to access the shares, press Windows logo + R to open the Run dialog box and type net use \\192.168.1.1 /delete /yes and press Enter. (192.168.1.1 is your router's LAN IP address. If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192.168.1.x, the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192.168.1.1 to 192.168.0.1 to avoid IP conflict; in this case, please try net use \\192.168.0.1
/delete / yes.) 4.11 NAT Choose NAT, and you can enable or disable the NAT and Hardware NAT Control feature. The NAT Rules and Hardware NAT will work properly only when the NAT Control feature is enabled. Figure 4-64 The Forwarding menu Enable NAT Control - If enabled, the NAT function and the Forwarding configuration will take effect.
- 73 -
Disable NAT Control - If disabled, neither NAT function nor Forwarding configuration will Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router take effect. Enable Hardware NAT Control - If enabled, the Hardware NAT feature will take effect. Disable Hardware NAT Control - If disabled, neither Hardware NAT feature will take effect. 4.12 Forwarding Figure 4-65 The Forwarding menu There are four submenus under the Forwarding menu (shown in Figure 4-65): Virtual Servers, Port Triggering, DMZ and UPnP. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. 4.12.1 Virtual Servers Choose menu ForwardingVirtual Servers, and then you can view and add virtual servers in the next screen (shown in Figure 4-66). Virtual servers can be used for setting up public services on your LAN. A virtual server is defined as a service port, and all requests from Internet to this service port will be redirected to the computer specified by the server IP. Any PC that was used for a virtual server must have a static or reserved IP address because its IP address may change when using the DHCP function. If you want the Virtual Servers configuration take effect, please make sure the NAT is enabled. Figure 4-66 Virtual Servers Service Port - The numbers of External Service Ports. You can enter a service port or a range of service ports (the format is XXX YYY; XXX is the Start port and YYY is the End port).
- 74 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Internal Port - The Internal Service Port number of the PC running the service application. You can leave it blank if the Internal Port is the same as the Service Port, or enter a specific port number when Service Port is a single one. IP Address - The IP address of the PC running the service application. Protocol - The protocol used for this application, either TCP, UDP, or All (all protocols supported by the router). Status - The status of this entry, "Enabled" means the virtual server entry is enabled. Common Service Port - Some common services already exist in the drop-down list. Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. To setup a virtual server entry:
1. Click the Add New... button. (pop-up Figure 4-67) 2. Select the service you want to use from the Common Service Port list. If the Common Service Port menu does not list the service that you want to use, enter the number of the service port or service port range in the Service Port field. 3. Enter the IP address of the computer running the service application in the IP Address field. 4. Select the protocol used for this application in the Protocol drop-down list, either TCP, UDP, or All. 5. Select the Enabled option in the Status drop-down list. 6. Click the Save button. Figure 4-67 Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry Note:
It is possible that you have a computer or server that has more than one type of available service. If so, select another service, and type the same IP address for that computer or server.
- 75 -
To modify or delete an existing entry:
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1. Find the desired entry in the table. 2. Click Modify or Delete as desired on the Modify column. Click the Enable/ Disable All button to make all entries enabled/ disabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. Click the Next button to go to the next page and click the Previous button to return to the previous page. Note:
If you set the service port of the virtual server as 80, you must set the Web management port on Security Remote Management page to be any other value except 80 such as 8080. Otherwise there will be a conflict to disable the virtual server. 4.12.2 Port Triggering Choose menu ForwardingPort Triggering, you can view and add port triggering in the next screen (shown in Figure 4-68). Some applications require multiple connections, like Internet games, video conferencing, Internet telephoning and so on. Port Triggering is used for some of these applications that cannot work with a pure NAT router. To add a new rule, follow the steps below. Figure 4-68 Port Triggering 1. Click the Add New button, the next screen will pop-up as shown in Figure 4-69. 2. Select a common application from the Common Applications drop-down list, then the Trigger Port field and the Incoming Ports field will be automatically filled. If the Common Applications do not have the application you need, enter the Trigger Port and the Incoming Ports manually. 3. Select the protocol used for Trigger Port from the Trigger Protocol drop-down list, either TCP, UDP, or All.
- 76 -
4. Select the protocol used for Incoming Ports from the Incoming Protocol drop-down list, Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router either TCP or UDP, or All. 5. Select Enabled in Status field. 6. Click the Save button to save the new rule. Figure 4-69 Add or Modify a Triggering Entry Trigger Port - The port for outgoing traffic. An outgoing connection using this port will trigger this rule. Trigger Protocol - The protocol used for Trigger Ports, either TCP, UDP, or All (all protocols supported by the router). Incoming Port - The port or port range used by the remote system when it responds to the outgoing request. A response using one of these ports will be forwarded to the PC which triggered this rule. You can input at most 5 groups of ports (or port sections). Every group of ports must be separated with ",", for example, 2000-2038, 2046, 2050-2051, 2085, 3010-3030. Incoming Protocol - The protocol used for Incoming Port, either TCP, UDP, or ALL (all protocols supported by the router). Status - The status of this entry, Enabled means the Port Triggering entry is enabled. Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. Common Applications - Some popular applications already listed in the drop-down list of Incoming Protocol. To modify or delete an existing entry:
1. Find the desired entry in the table. 2. Click Modify or Delete as desired on the Modify column.
- 77 -
Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Click the Disable All button to make all entries disabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries Once the router is configured, the operation is as follows:
1. A local host makes an outgoing connection to an external host using a destination port number defined in the Trigger Port field. 2. The router records this connection, opens the incoming port or ports associated with this entry in the Port Triggering table, and associates them with the local host. 3. When necessary, the external host will be able to connect to the local host using one of the ports defined in the Incoming Ports field. Note:
1. When the trigger connection is released, the corresponding opened ports will be closed. 2. Each rule can only be used by one host on the LAN at a time. The trigger connection of other hosts on the LAN will be refused. Incoming Ports ranges cannot overlap each other. 3. 4.12.3 DMZ Choose menu ForwardingDMZ, and then you can view and configure DMZ host in the screen
(shown in Figure 4-70).The DMZ host feature allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special-purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing. The router forwards packets of all services to the DMZ host. Any PC whose port is being forwarded must have its DHCP client function disabled and should have a new static IP Address assigned to it because its IP Address may be changed when using the DHCP function. Figure 4-70 DMZ To assign a computer or server to be a DMZ server:
1. Click the Enable button. 2. Enter the IP address of a local PC that is set to be DMZ host in the DMZ Host IP Address field.
- 78 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 3. Click the Save button. 4.12.4 UPnP Choose menu ForwardingUPnP, and then you can view the information about UPnP in the screen (shown in Figure 4-71). The Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) feature allows the devices, such as Internet computers, to access the local host resources or devices as needed. UPnP devices can be automatically discovered by the UPnP service application on the LAN. Figure 4-71 UPnP Setting Current UPnP Status - UPnP can be enabled or disabled by clicking the Enable or Disable button. This feature is enabled by default. Current UPnP Settings List - This table displays the current UPnP information. App Description - The description about the application which initiates the UPnP request. External Port - The port which the router opened for the application. Protocol - The type of protocol which is opened. Internal Port - The port which the router opened for local host. IP Address - The IP address of the local host which initiates the UPnP request. Status - Either Enabled or Disabled. "Enabled" means that the port is still active;
otherwise, the port is inactive. Click the Enable button to enable UPnP. Click the Disable button to disable UPnP. Click the Refresh button to update the Current UPnP Settings List.
- 79 -
4.13 Security Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-72 The Security menu There are four submenus under the Security menu as shown in Figure 4-72: Basic Security, Advanced Security, Local Management and Remote Management. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. 4.13.1 Basic Security Choose menu Security Basic Security, and then you can configure the basic security in the screen as shown in Figure 4-73. Figure 4-73 Basic Security Firewall - A firewall protects your network from the outside world. Here you can enable or disable the routers firewall. SPI Firewall - SPI (Stateful Packet Inspection, also known as dynamic packet filtering) helps to prevent cyber attacks by tracking more state per session. It validates that the traffic passing through the session conforms to the protocol. SPI Firewall is enabled by factory default. If you want all the computers on the LAN exposed to the outside world, you can disable it.
- 80 -
VPN - VPN Passthrough must be enabled if you want to allow VPN tunnels using VPN Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router protocols to pass through the router. PPTP Passthrough the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) to be tunneled through an IP network. To allow PPTP tunnels to pass through the router, click Enable.
- Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
(PPTP) allows L2TP Passthrough - Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) is the method used to enable Point-to-Point sessions via the Internet on the Layer Two level. To allow L2TP tunnels to pass through the router, click Enable. IPSec Passthrough - Internet Protocol security (IPSec) is a suite of protocols for ensuring private, secure communications over Internet Protocol (IP) networks, through the use of cryptographic security services. To allow IPSec tunnels to pass through the router, click Enable. ALG - It is recommended to enable Application Layer Gateway (ALG) because ALG allows customized Network Address Translation (NAT) traversal filters to be plugged into the gateway to support address and port translation for certain application layer "control/data"
protocols such as FTP, TFTP, H323 etc. FTP ALG - To allow FTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT, click Enable. TFTP ALG - To allow TFTP clients and servers to transfer data across NAT, click Enable. H323 ALG - To allow Microsoft NetMeeting clients to communicate across NAT, click Enable. RTSP ALG - To allow some media player clients to communicate with some streaming media servers across NAT, click Enable. Click the Save button to save your settings. 4.13.2 Advanced Security Choose menu Security Advanced Security, and then you can protect the router from being attacked by TCP-SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP-Flood in the screen as shown in Figure 4-74.
- 81 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-74 Advanced Security Packets Statistics Interval (5~60) - The default value is 10. Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds from the drop-down list. The Packets Statistics Interval value indicates the time section of the packets statistics. The result of the statistics is used for analysis by SYN Flood, UDP Flood and ICMP-Flood. DoS Protection - Denial of Service protection. Check the Enable or Disable button to enable or disable the DoS protection function. Only when it is enabled, will the flood filters be enabled. Note:
Dos Protection will take effect only when the Traffic Statistics in System Tool Statistics is enabled. Enable ICMP-FLOOD Attack Filtering - Enable or Disable the ICMP-FLOOD Attack Filtering. ICMP-FLOOD Packets Threshold (5~3600) - The default value is 50. Enter a value between 5 ~ 3600. When the current ICMP-FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value, the router will startup the blocking function immediately. Enable UDP-FLOOD Filtering - Enable or Disable the UDP-FLOOD Filtering. UDP-FLOOD Packets Threshold (5~3600) - The default value is 500. Enter a value between 5 ~ 3600. When the current UPD-FLOOD Packets number is beyond the set value, the router will startup the blocking function immediately.
- 82 -
Enable TCP-SYN-FLOOD Attack Filtering - Enable or Disable the TCP-SYN-FLOOD Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Attack Filtering. TCP-SYN-FLOOD Packets Threshold (5~3600) - The default value is 50. Enter a value between 5 ~ 3600. When the current TCP-SYN-FLOOD Packets numbers is beyond the set value, the router will startup the blocking function immediately. Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port - Enable or Disable Ignore Ping Packet From WAN Port. The default setting is disabled. If enabled, the ping packet from the Internet cannot access the router. Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port - Enable or Disable Forbid Ping Packet From LAN Port. The default setting is disabled. If enabled, the ping packet from LAN cannot access the router. This function can be used to defend against some viruses. Click the Save button to save the settings. Click the Blocked DoS Host List button to display the DoS host table by blocking. 4.13.3 Local Management Choose menu Security Local Management, and then you can configure the management rule in the screen as shown in Figure 4-75. The management feature allows you to deny computers in LAN from accessing the router. Figure 4-75 Local Management By default, the radio button All the PCs on the LAN are allowed to access the router's Web-Based Utility is checked. If you want to allow PCs with specific MAC Addresses to access the Setup page of the router's Web-Based Utility locally from inside the network, check the radio button Only the PCs listed can browse the built-in web pages to perform Administrator tasks, and then enter each MAC Address in a separate field. The format for the MAC Address is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX (X is any hexadecimal digit). Only the PCs with MAC address listed can
- 83 -
use the password to browse the built-in web pages to perform Administrator tasks while all the others will be blocked. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router After click the Add button, your PC's MAC Address will be placed in the list above. Click the Save button to save your settings. Note:
If your PC is blocked but you want to access the router again, use a pin to press and hold the WPS/Reset button (hole) on the back panel for about 5 seconds to reset the routers factory defaults on the routers Web-Based Utility. 4.13.4 Choose menu Security Remote Management, and then you can configure the Remote Management function in the screen as shown in Figure 4-76. This feature allows you to manage your router from a remote location via the Internet. Remote Management Figure 4-76 Remote Management Web Management Port - Web browser access normally uses the standard HTTP service port 80. This router's default remote management web port number is 80. For greater security, you can change the remote management web port to a custom port by entering that number in the box provided. Choose a number between 1 and 65534 but do not use the number of any common service port. Remote Management IP Address - This is the current address you will use when accessing your router from the Internet. This function is disabled when the IP address is set to the default value of 0.0.0.0. To enable this function change 0.0.0.0 to a valid IP address. If set to 255.255.255.255, then all the hosts can access the router from internet. Note:
1. To access the router, you should type your router's WAN IP address into your browser's address (in IE) or Location (in Navigator) box, followed by a colon and the custom port number. For example, if your router's WAN address is 202.96.12.8, and the port number used is 8080, please enter http://202.96.12.8:8080 in your browser. Later, you may be asked for the router's password. After successfully entering the username and password, you will be able to access the router's web-based utility. 2. Be sure to change the router's default password to a very secure password.
- 84 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4.14 Parental Control Choose menu Parental Control, and then you can configure the parental control in the screen as shown in Figure 4-77. The Parental Control function can be used to control the internet activities of the child, limit the child to access certain websites and restrict the time of surfing. Figure 4-77 Parental Control Settings To add a new entry, please follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop-up as shown in Figure 4-78. Figure 4-78 Add or Modify Parental Control Entry
- 85 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Parental Control - Check Enable if you want this function to take effect; otherwise, check Disable. MAC Address of Parental PC - In this field, enter the MAC address of the controlling PC, or you can make use of the Copy To Above button below. MAC Address of Your PC - This field displays the MAC address of the PC that is managing this router. If the MAC Address of your adapter is registered, you can click the Copy To Above button to fill this address to the MAC Address of Parental PC field above. Website Description - Description of the allowed website for the PC controlled. Schedule - The time period allowed for the PC controlled to access the Internet. For detailed information, please go to Access Control Schedule. Enable - Check this option to enable a specific entry. Modify - Here you can edit or delete an existing entry. 2. Enter the MAC address of the PC (e.g. 00-11-22-33-44-AA) youd like to control in the MAC Address of Child PC field, or you can choose the MAC address from the All Address in Current LAN drop-down list. 3. Give a description (e.g. Allow Google) for the website allowed to be accessed in the Website Description field. 4. Enter the allowed domain name of the website, either the full name or the keywords (e.g. google) in the Allowed Domain Name field. Any domain name with keywords in it
(www.google.com, www.google.com.hk) will be allowed. 5. Select from the Effective Time drop-down list the schedule (e.g. Schedule_1) you want. If there are not suitable schedules for you, click the Schedule in red below to go to the Advance Schedule Settings page and create the schedule you need. 6. In the Status field, you can select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry. 7. Click the Save button. Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list. Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. For example: If you desire that the child PC with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA can access www.google.com on Saturday only while the parent PC with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-BB is without any restriction, you should follow the settings below.
- 86 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1. Click Parental Control menu on the left to enter the Parental Control Settings page. Check Enable and enter the MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-BB in the MAC Address of Parental PC field. 2. Click Access Control Schedule on the left to enter the Schedule Settings page. Click Add New... button to create a new schedule with Schedule Description is Schedule_1, Day is Sat and Time is all day-24 hours. 3. Click Parental Control menu on the left to go back to the Add or Modify Parental Control Entry page:
1) Click Add New... button. 2) Enter 00-11-22-33-44-AA in the MAC Address of Child PC field. 3) Enter Allow Google in the Website Description field. 4) Enter www.google.com in the Allowed Domain Name field. 5) Select Schedule_1 you create just now from the Effective Time drop-down list. 6) In Status field, select Enable. 4. Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Parental Control Settings page and see the following list, as shown in Figure 4-79. Figure 4-79 Parental Control Settings 4.15 Access Control Figure 4-80 Access Control There are four submenus under the Access Control menu as shown in Figure 4-80: Rule, Host, Target and Schedule. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function.
- 87 -
4.15.1 Rule Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu Access Control Rule, and then you can view and set Access Control rules in the screen as shown in Figure 4-81. Figure 4-81 Access Control Rule Management Enable Internet Access Control - Select the check box to enable the Internet Access Control function, so the Default Filter Policy can take effect. Rule Name - Here displays the name of the rule and this name is unique. Host - Here displays the host selected in the corresponding rule. Target - Here displays the target selected in the corresponding rule. Schedule - Here displays the schedule selected in the corresponding rule. Enable - Here displays the status of the rule, enabled or not. Check this option to enable a specific entry. Modify - Here you can edit or delete an existing rule. Setup Wizard - Click the Setup Wizard button to create a new rule entry. Add New... - Click the Add New... button to add a new rule entry. Enable All - Click the Enable All button to enable all the rules in the list. Disable All - Click the Disable All button to disable all the rules in the list. Delete All - Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table.
- 88 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Move - You can change the entrys order as desired. Enter in the first box the ID number of the entry you want to move and in the second box another ID number, and then click the Move button to change the entries order. Click the Next button to go to the next page. Click the Previous button to return to the previous page. There are two methods to add a new rule. Method One:
1. Click Setup Wizard button and the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-82. Figure 4-82 Quick Setup Create a Host Entry Host Description - In this field, create a unique description for the host (e.g. Host_1). Mode - Here are two options, IP Address and MAC Address. You can select either of them from the drop-down list. If the IP Address is selected, you can see the following item:
LAN IP Address - Enter the IP address or address range of the host in dotted-decimal format (e.g. 192.168.0.23). If the MAC Address is selected, you can see the following item:
MAC Address - Enter the MAC address of the host in XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX format (e.g. 00-11-22-33-44-AA). 2. Click Next when finishing creating the host entry, and the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-83.
- 89 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-83 Quick Setup Create an Access Target Entry Target Description - In this field, create a description for the target. Note that this description should be unique (e.g. Target_1). Mode - Here are two options, IP Address and Domain Name. You can choose either of them from the drop-down list. If the IP Address is selected, you will see the following items:
IP Address - Enter the IP address (or address range) of the target (targets) in dotted-decimal format (e.g. 192.168.0.23). Target Port - Specify the port or port range for the target. For some common service ports, you can make use of the Common Service Port item below. Protocol - Here are four options, All, TCP, UDP, and ICMP. Select one of them from the drop-down list for the target. Common Service Port - Here lists some common service ports. Select one from the drop-down list and the corresponding port number will be filled in the Target Port field automatically. For example, if you select "FTP", "21" will be filled in the Target Port automatically. If the Domain Name is selected, you will see the following items:
Domain Name - Here you can enter 4 domain names, either the full name or the keywords (for example, google). Any domain name with keywords in it (www.google.com, www.google.cn) will be blocked or allowed. 3. Click Next when finishing creating the access target entry, and the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-84.
- 90 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-84 Quick Setup Create an Advanced Schedule Entry Schedule Description - In this field, create a description for the schedule. Note that this description should be unique (e.g. Schedule_1). Day - Choose Select Days and select the certain day (days), or choose Everyday. Time - Select "24 hours", or specify the Start Time and Stop Time yourself. Start Time - Enter the start time in HHMM format (HHMM are 4 numbers). For example 0800 is 8:00. Stop Time - Enter the stop time in HHMM format (HHMM are 4 numbers). For example 2000 is 20:00. 4. Click Next when finishing creating the advanced schedule entry, and the next screen will appear as shown in Figure 4-85. Figure 4-85 Quick Setup Create an Internet Access Control Entry
- 91 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Rule - In this field, create a name for the rule. Note that this name should be unique (e.g. Rule_1). Host - In this field, select a host from the drop-down list for the rule. The default value is the Host Description you set just now. Target - In this filed, select a target from the drop-down list for the rule. The default value is the Target Description you set just now. Schedule - In this field, select a schedule from the drop-down list for the rule. The default value is the Schedule Description you set just now. Status - In this field, there are two options, Enabled or Disabled. Select Enabled so that the rule will take effect. Select Disabled so that the rule won't take effect. 5. Click Finish to complete adding a new rule. Method Two:
1. Click the Add New button and the next screen will pop up as shown in Figure 4-86. 2. Give a name (e.g. Rule_1) for the rule in the Rule Name field. 3. Select a host from the Host drop-down list or choose Click Here To Add New Host List. 4. Select a target from the Target drop-sown list or choose Click Here To Add New Target List. 5. Select a schedule from the Schedule drop-down list or choose Click Here To Add New Schedule. 6. In the Status field, select Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable your entry. 7. Click the Save button. Figure 4-86 Add Internet Access Control Entry
- 92 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router For example: If you desire to allow the host with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA to access www.google.com only from 18:00 to 20:00 on Saturday and Sunday, and forbid other hosts in the LAN to access the Internet, you should follow the settings below:
1. Click the submenu Rule of Access Control in the left to return to the Rule List page. Select Enable Internet Access Control and choose "Allow the packets specified by any enabled access control policy to pass through the router". 2. We recommend that you click Setup Wizard button to finish all the following settings. 3. Click the submenu Host of Access Control in the left to enter the Host List page. Add a new entry with the Host Description is Host_1 and MAC Address is 00-11-22-33-44-AA. 4. Click the submenu Target of Access Control in the left to enter the Target List page. Add a new entry with the Target Description is Target_1 and Domain Name is www.google.com. 5. Click the submenu Schedule of Access Control in the left to enter the Schedule List page. Add a new entry with the Schedule Description is Schedule_1, Day is Sat and Sun, Start Time is 1800 and Stop Time is 2000. 6. Click the submenu Rule of Access Control in the left, Click Add New... button to add a new rule as follows:
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) In Rule Name field, create a name for the rule. Note that this name should be unique, for example Rule_1. In Host field, select Host_1. In Target field, select Target_1. In Schedule field, select Schedule_1. In Status field, select Enabled. 6) Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Access Control Rule Management page and see the following list. 4.15.2 Host Choose menu Access Control Host, and then you can view and set a Host list in the screen as shown in Figure 4-87. The host list is necessary for the Access Control Rule.
- 93 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-87 Host Settings Host Description - Here displays the description of the host and this description is unique. Information - Here displays the information about the host. It can be IP or MAC. Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. To add a new entry, please follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New button. 2. In the Mode field, select IP Address or MAC Address. 1) If you select IP Address, the screen shown is Figure 4-88. In Host Description field, create a unique description for the host (e.g. Host_1). In LAN IP Address field, enter the IP address. 2) If you select MAC Address, the screen shown is Figure 4-89. In Host Description field, create a unique description for the host (e.g. Host_1). In MAC Address field, enter the MAC address. 3. Click the Save button to complete the settings. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. Figure 4-88 Add or Modify a Host Entry
- 94 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-89 Add or Modify a Host Entry For example: If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA, you should first follow the settings below:
1. Click Add New... button in Figure 4-87 to enter the Add or Modify a Host Entry page. 2. 3. 4. In Mode field, select MAC Address from the drop-down list. In Host Description field, create a unique description for the host (e.g. Host_1). In MAC Address field, enter 00-11-22-33-44-AA. 5. Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Host Settings page and see the following list. 4.15.3 Target Choose menu Access Control Target, and then you can view and set a Target list in the screen as shown in Figure 4-90. The target list is necessary for the Access Control Rule. Figure 4-90 Target Settings Target Description - Here displays the description about the target and this description is unique. Information - The target can be IP address, port, or domain name.
- 95 -
Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router To add a new entry, please follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New button. 2. 3. In Mode field, select IP Address or Domain Name. If you select IP Address, the screen shown is Figure 4-91. Figure 4-91 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry In Target Description field, create a unique description for the target (e.g. Target_1). In IP Address field, enter the IP address of the target. 1) 2) 3) Select a common service from Common Service Port drop-down list, so that the Target Port will be automatically filled. If the Common Service Port drop-down list doesnt have the service you want, specify the Target Port manually. In Protocol field, select TCP, UDP, ICMP or ALL from the drop-down list. 4) 4. If you select Domain Name, the screen shown is Figure 4-92. Figure 4-92 Add or Modify an Access Target Entry
- 96 -
1) 2) Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router In Target Description field, create a unique description for the target (e.g. Target_1). In Domain Name field, enter the domain name, either the full name or the keywords (for example, google) in the blank. Any domain name with keywords in it (www.google.com, www.google.cn) will be blocked or allowed. You can enter 4 domain names. 5. Click the Save button. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. For example: If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA in the LAN to access www.google.com only, you should first follow the settings below:
1. Click Add New button in Figure 4-90 to enter the Add or Modify an Access Target Entry page. 2. 3. 4. In Mode field, select Domain Name from the drop-down list. In Target Description field, create a unique description for the target (e.g. Target_1). In Domain Name field, enter www.google.com. 5. Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Target Settings page and see the following list. 4.15.4 Schedule Choose menu Access Control Schedule, and then you can view and set a Schedule list in the next screen as shown in Figure 4-93. The Schedule list is necessary for the Access Control Rule. Figure 4-93 Schedule Settings
- 97 -
Schedule Description - Here displays the description of the schedule and this description is Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router unique. Day - Here displays the day(s) in a week. Time - Here displays the time period in a day. Modify - Here you can edit or delete an existing schedule. To add a new schedule, follow the steps below:
1. Click Add New... button shown in Figure 4-93 and the next screen will pop-up as shown in Figure 4-94. 2. In Schedule Description field, create a unique description for the schedule (e.g. Schedule_1). 3. In Day field, select the day or days you need. 4. In Time field, you can select all day-24 hours or you may enter the Start Time and Stop Time in the corresponding field. 5. Click Save to complete the settings. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries in the table. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. Figure 4-94 Advanced Schedule Settings For example: If you desire to restrict the internet activities of host with MAC address 00-11-22-33-44-AA to access www.google.com only from 18:00 to 20:00 on Saturday and Sunday, you should first follow the settings below:
- 98 -
1. Click Add New... button shown in Figure 4-93 to enter the Advanced Schedule Settings Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router page. 2. 3. 4. In Schedule Description field, create a unique description for the schedule (e.g. Schedule_1). In Day field, check the Select Days radio button and then select Sat and Sun. In Time field, enter 1800 in Start Time field and 2000 in Stop Time field. 5. Click Save to complete the settings. Then you will go back to the Schedule Settings page and see the following list. 4.16 Advanced Routing Figure 4-95 Advanced Routing There are two submenus under the Advanced Routing menu as shown in Figure 4-95: Static Routing List and System Routing Table. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. 4.16.1 Static Routing List Choose menu Advanced Routing Static Routing List, and then you can configure the static route in the next screen (shown in Figure 4-96). A static route is a pre-determined path that network information must travel to reach a specific host or network. Figure 4-96 Static Routing
- 99 -
To add static routing entries:
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1. Click Add New shown in Figure 4-96, you will see the following screen. Figure 4-97 Add or Modify a Static Route Entry 2. Enter the following data:
Destination Network - The Destination Network is the address of the network or host that you want to assign to a static route. Subnet Mask - The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP Address is the network portion, and which portion is the host portion. Default Gateway - This is the IP Address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the router and the network or host. 3. Select Enabled or Disabled for this entry on the Status drop-down list. 4. Click the Save button to make the entry take effect. Other configurations for the entries:
Click the Delete button to delete the entry. Click the Enable All button to enable all the entries. Click the Disable All button to disable all the entries. Click the Delete All button to delete all the entries. Click the Previous button to view the information in the previous screen, click the Next button to view the information in the next screen. 4.16.2 System Routing Table Choose menu Advanced Routing System Routing Table, and then you can view the System Routing Table in the next screen (shown in Figure 4-98). System routing table views all of the valid route entries in use. The Destination IP address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and Interface will be displayed for each entry.
- 100 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-98 System Routing Table Destination Network - The Destination Network is the address of the network or host to which the static route is assigned. Subnet Mask - The Subnet Mask determines which portion of an IP address is the network portion, and which portion is the host portion. Gateway - This is the IP address of the gateway device that allows for contact between the router and the network or host. Interface - This interface tells you either the Destination IP Address is on the LAN & WLAN
(internal wired and wireless networks), or on the WAN (Internet). 4.17 Bandwidth Control Figure 4-99 Bandwidth Control There are two submenus under the Bandwidth Control menu as shown in Figure 4-99: Control Settings and Rules List. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding function. The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below. 4.17.1 Control Settings Choose menu Bandwidth Control Control Settings, and then you can configure the Egress Bandwidth and Ingress Bandwidth in the next screen. Their values you configure should be less than 100000Kbps. For optimal control of the bandwidth, please select the right Line Type and ask your ISP for the total bandwidth of the egress and ingress.
- 101 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-100 Bandwidth Control Settings Enable Bandwidth Control - Check this box so that the Bandwidth Control settings can take effect. Line Type - Select the right type for you network connection. If you dont know how to choose, please ask your ISP for the information. Egress Bandwidth - The upload speed through the Internet port. Ingress Bandwidth - The download speed through the Internet port. 4.17.2 Rules List Choose menu Bandwidth Control Rules List, and then you can view and configure the Bandwidth Control rules in the screen below. Figure 4-101 Bandwidth Control Rules List Description - This is the information about the rules such as address range. Egress bandwidth - This field displays the max and mix upload bandwidth through the Internet port, the default is 0. Ingress bandwidth - This field displays the max and mix download bandwidth through the Internet port, the default is 0. Enable - This displays the status of the rule. Modify - Click Modify to edit the rule. Click Delete to delete the rule.
- 102 -
To add/modify a Bandwidth Control rule, follow the steps below. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1. Click Add New shown in Figure 4-101, you will see a new screen shown in Figure 4-102. 2. Enter the information like the screen shown below. Figure 4-102 Bandwidth Control Rule Settings 3. Click the Save button. 4.18 IP & MAC Binding Figure 4-103 the IP & MAC Binding menu There are two submenus under the IP &MAC Binding menu (shown in Figure 4-103): Binding Settings and ARP List. Click any of them, and you will be able to scan or configure the corresponding function. The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below. 4.18.1 Binding Settings This page displays the IP & MAC Binding Setting table; you can operate it in accord with your desire (shown in Figure 4-104). Figure 4-104 Binding Setting
- 103 -
MAC Address - The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router IP Address - The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN. Bind - Check this option to enable ARP binding for a specific device. Modify - To modify or delete an existing entry. When you want to add or modify an IP & MAC Binding entry, you can click the Add New button or Modify button, and then you will go to the next page. This page is used for adding or modifying an IP & MAC Binding entry (shown in Figure 4-105). Figure 4-105 IP & MAC Binding Setting (Add & Modify) To add IP & MAC Binding entries, follow the steps below. 1. Click the Add New... button as shown in Figure 4-104. 2. Enter the MAC Address and IP Address. 3. Select the Bind checkbox. 4. Click the Save button to save it. To modify or delete an existing entry, follow the steps below. 1. Find the desired entry in the table. 2. Click Modify or Delete as desired on the Modify column. To find an existing entry, follow the steps below. 1. Click the Find button as shown in Figure 4-104. 2. Enter the MAC Address or IP Address. 3. Click the Find button in the page as shown in Figure 4-106.
- 104 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-106 Find IP & MAC Binding Entry Click the Enable All button to make all entries enabled. Click the Delete All button to delete all entries. ARP List 4.18.2 To manage the computer, you could observe the computers in the LAN by checking the relationship of MAC address and IP address on the ARP list, and you could also configure the items on the ARP list. This page displays the ARP List; it shows all the existing IP & MAC Binding entries (shown in Figure 4-107). Figure 4-107 ARP List IP Address - The assigned IP address of the controlled computer in the LAN. 1. MAC Address - The MAC address of the controlled computer in the LAN. 2. 3. Status - Indicates whether or not the MAC and IP addresses are bound. 4. Configure - Load or delete an item. Load - Load the item to the IP & MAC Binding list. Delete - Delete the item. Click the Bind All button to bind all the current items, available after enable. Click the Load All button to load all items to the IP & MAC Binding list. Click the Refresh button to refresh all items. Note:
An item could not be loaded to the IP & MAC Binding list if the IP address of the item has been loaded before. Error warning will prompt as well. Likewise, "Load All" only loads the items without interference to the IP & MAC Binding list.
- 105 -
4.19 Dynamic DNS Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu Dynamic DNS, and you can configure the Dynamic DNS function. The router offers the DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System) feature, which allows the hosting of a website, FTP server, or e-mail server with a fixed domain name (named by yourself) and a dynamic IP address, and then your friends can connect to your server by entering your domain name no matter what your IP address is. Before using this feature, you need to sign up for DDNS service providers such as www.comexe.cn, www.dyndns.org, or www.no-ip.com. The Dynamic DNS client service provider will give you a password or key. 4.19.1 Comexe.cn DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www.comexe.cn, the page will appear as shown in Figure 4-108. Figure 4-108 Comexe.cn DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the Domain Name your dynamic DNS service provider gave. 2. Enter the User Name for your DDNS account. 3. Enter the Password for your DDNS account. 4. Click the Login button to login the DDNS service.
- 106 -
Connection Status -The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Click Logout to log out of the DDNS service. Note:
If you want to login again with another account after a successful login, please click the Logout button, then input your new username and password and click the Login button. 4.19.2 Dyndns.org DDNS If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www.dyndns.org, the page will appear as shown in Figure 4-109. Figure 4-109 Dyndns.org DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the User Name for your DDNS account. 2. Enter the Password for your DDNS account. 3. Enter the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider. 4. Click the Login button to login to the DDNS service. Connection Status -The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here. Click Logout to logout of the DDNS service. Note:
If you want to login again with another account after a successful login, please click the Logout button, then input your new username and password and click the Login button.
- 107 -
4.19.3 No-ip.com DDNS Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router If the dynamic DNS Service Provider you select is www.no-ip.com, the page will appear as shown in Figure 4-110. Figure 4-110 No-ip.com DDNS Settings To set up for DDNS, follow these instructions:
1. Enter the User Name for your DDNS account. 2. Enter the Password for your DDNS account. 3. Enter the Domain Name you received from dynamic DNS service provider. 4. Click the Login button to login to the DDNS service. Connection Status - The status of the DDNS service connection is displayed here. Click Logout to log out the DDNS service. Note:
If you want to login again with another account after a successful login, please click the Logout button, then input your new username and password and click the Login button. 4.20 IPv6 Support Figure 4-111 IPv6 Support
- 108 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router There are two submenus under the IPv6 Support menu (shown in Figure 4-111): IPv6 Status and IPv6 Setup. Click either of them, and you will be able to scan or configure the corresponding function. The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below. 4.20.1 IPv6 Status Figure 4-112 IPv6 Status The IPv6 Status page displays the router's current IPv6 status and configuration. All information is read-only. WAN Connection Type - The IPv6 connection way for WAN IPv6 Address - The WAN IPv6 address IPv6 Default Gateway - The router's default gateway Primary IPv6 DNS - The primary IPv6 DNS address Secondary IPv6 DNS - The secondary IPv6 DNS address LAN
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address:
SLAAC
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address.
- 109 -
4.20.2 IPv6 Setup Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-113 Enable/Disable IPv6 Enable IPv6 - Tick the checkbox to enable the IPv6 function. Its enabled by default. WAN Connection Type - Choose the correct WAN connection type based on your ISP network topology. DHCPv6 - Connections which use dynamic IPv6 address assignment. Static IPv6 - Connections which use static IPv6 address assignment. PPPoEv6 - Connections which use PPPoEV6 that requires a user name and password. Tunnel 6to4 - Connections which use 6to4 address assignment. Different types of WAN connection require you to do different settings. Below are the detailed explanations for the respective type.
- 110 -
1) DHCPv6 Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-114 DHCPv6 Get non-temporary IPv6 address - Get a non-temporary IPv6 address from the ISP. Get IPv6 prefix delegation - Get a temporary IPv6 address and IPv6 prefix from the ISP, the temporary IPv6 address is set to the WAN port, and the LAN port advertise IPv6 address by RADVD or DHCPs. IPv6 Address - The IPv6 address assigned by your ISP dynamically. Click the Renew button to renew the IPv6 parameters from your ISP. Click the Release button to release the IPv6 parameters from your ISP. If your ISP gives you one or two DNS IPv6 addresses, select Use the following IPv6 DNS Servers and enter the Primary IPv6 DNS and Secondary IPv6 DNS into the correct fields. Otherwise, the DNS servers will be assigned from ISP dynamically. Primary IPv6 DNS - Enter the DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Secondary IPv6 DNS - Enter another DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP.
- 111 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Note:
If you get Address not found error when you access a Web site, it is likely that your DNS servers are set up improperly. You should contact your ISP to get DNS server addresses. Get IPv6 with Unicast DHCP - A few ISPs' DHCP servers do not support the broadcast applications. If you can't get the IPv6 Address normally, you can choose Unicast. (You generally need not to check this option). IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address: SLAAC
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address. 2) Static IPv6 Figure 4-115 Static IPv6
- 112 -
IPv6 Address - Enter the IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Default Gateway - Enter the default gateway in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1500 Bytes. For some ISPs, you may need to modify the MTU. But this is rarely required, and should not be done unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP connection. Primary DNS - Enter the DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Secondary DNS - Enter another DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address: SLAAC
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address. 3) PPPoEv6 Figure 4-116 PPPoEv6
- 113 -
User Name/Password - Enter the User Name and Password provided by your ISP. These Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router fields are case-sensitive. Get IPv6 Address Way Get non-temporary IPv6 address - Get a non-temporary IPv6 address by DHCPv6 from the ISP. Get IPv6 prefix delegation - Get a prefix delegation IPv6 address by DHCPv6 from the ISP, and the clients in LAN create IPv6 address with the delegation. Use IP address specified by ISP - Input a static IPv6 address from the ISP Click the Connect button to connect immediately. Click the Disconnect button to disconnect immediately. IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address: SLAAC
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address. 4) Tunnel 6to4 Figure 4-117 Tunnel 6to4
- 114 -
Address/Subnet Mask/Default Gateway - the IPv4 address/ subnet mask/ default gateway Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router assigned, in dotted-decimal notation. MTU Size - The normal MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value for most Ethernet networks is 1480 Bytes. For some ISPs, you may need to modify the MTU. But this is rarely required, and should not be done unless you are sure it is necessary for your ISP connection. If your ISP gives you one or two DNS IPv6 addresses, select Use the following IPv6 DNS Servers and enter the Primary IPv6 DNS and Secondary IPv6 DNS into the correct fields. Otherwise, the DNS servers will be assigned from ISP dynamically. Primary IPv6 DNS - Enter the DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided by your ISP. Secondary IPv6 DNS - Enter another DNS IPv6 address in dotted-decimal notation provided IPv6 Address Prefix -The Prefix of IPv6 Address by your ISP. IPv6 Address Assign Type - There are two types of assignation for IPv6 address: SLAAC
(Stateless address auto-configuration) and DHCPv6 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6) Server. SLAAC DHCPv6 Server Release Time - the length of time a network user will be allowed to keep connecting to the router with the current DHCPv6 Address. Enter the amount of time (in seconds) that the DHCPv6 address will be leased. The time range is 1~691200 seconds. The default value is 86400 seconds. IPv6 Address - Displays the LAN IPv6 Address. 4.21 System Tools Figure 4-118 The System Tools menu
- 115 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Choose menu System Tools, and you can see the submenus under the main menu: Time Settings, Diagnostic, Firmware Upgrade, Factory Defaults, Backup & Restore, Reboot, Password, System Log and Statistics. Click any of them, and you will be able to configure the corresponding functions. The detailed explanations for each submenu are provided below. 4.21.1 Time Settings Choose menu System ToolsTime Settings, and then you can configure the time on the following screen. Figure 4-119 Time settings Time Zone - Select your local time zone from this pull down list. Date - Enter your local date in MM/DD/YY into the right blanks. Time - Enter your local time in HH/MM/SS into the right blanks. NTP Server I / NTP Server II - Enter the address or domain of the NTP Server I or NTP Server II, and then the router will get the time from the NTP Server preferentially. In addition, the router built-in some common NTP Servers, so it can get time automatically once it connects the Internet. Enable Daylight Saving - Check the box to enable the Daylight Saving function. Start - The time to start the Daylight Saving. Select the month in the first field, the week in the second field, the day in the third field and the time in the last field. End - The time to end the Daylight Saving. Select the month in the first field, the week in the second field, the day in the third field and the time in the last field.
- 116 -
Daylight Saving Status - Displays the status whether the Daylight Saving is in use. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router To set time manually:
1. Select your local time zone. 2. Enter the Date in Month/Day/Year format. 3. Enter the Time in Hour/Minute/Second format. 4. Click Save. To set time automatically:
1. Select your local time zone. 2. Enter the address or domain of the NTP Server I or NTP Server II. 3. Click the Get GMT button to get system time from Internet if you have connected to the Internet. To set Daylight Saving:
1. Check the box to enable Daylight Saving. 2. Select the start time from the drop-down lists in the Start field. 3. Select the end time from the drop-down lists in the End field. 4. Click the Save button to save the settings. Figure 4-120 Time settings Note:
1. This setting will be used for some time-based functions such as firewall. You must specify your time zone once you login to the router successfully, otherwise, these functions will not take effect. 2. The time will be lost if the router is turned off. 3. The router will automatically obtain GMT from the Internet if it is configured accordingly. 4. The Daylight Saving will take effect one minute after the configurations are completed. 4.21.2 Diagnostic Choose menu System Tools Diagnostic, and then you can transact Ping or Traceroute function to check connectivity of your network in the following screen.
- 117 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-121 Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Tool - Check the radio button to select one diagnostic too. Ping - This diagnostic tool troubleshoots connectivity, reachability, and name resolution to a given host or gateway. Traceroute - This diagnostic tool tests the performance of a connection. Note:
You can use ping/traceroute to test both numeric IP address or domain name. If pinging/tracerouting the IP address is successful, but pinging/tracerouting the domain name is not, you might have a name resolution problem. In this case, ensure that the domain name you are specifying can be resolved by using Domain Name System (DNS) queries. IP Address/Domain Name - Enter the IP Address or Domain Name of the PC whose connection you wish to diagnose. Pings Count - Specifies the number of Echo Request messages sent. The default is 4. Ping Packet Size - Specifies the number of data bytes to be sent. The default is 64. Ping Timeout - Time to wait for a response, in milliseconds. The default is 800.
- 118 -
Traceroute Max TTL - Set the maximum number of hops (max TTL to be reached) in the Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router path to search for the target (destination). The default is 20. Click Start to check the connectivity of the Internet. The Diagnostic Results page displays the result of diagnosis. If the result is similar to the following screen, the connectivity of the Internet is fine. Figure 4-122 Diagnostic Results Note:
1. Only one user can use the diagnostic tools at one time. 2.
"Ping Count", "Ping Packet Size" and "Ping Timeout" are Ping Parameters, and "Traceroute Max TTL" is Traceroute Parameter. 4.21.3 Firmware Upgrade Choose menu System Tools Firmware Upgrade, and then you can update the latest version of firmware for the router on the following screen. Firmware Version - Displays the current firmware version. Figure 4-123 Firmware Upgrade Hardware Version - Displays the current hardware version. The hardware version of the upgrade file must accord with the routers current hardware version.
- 119 -
To upgrade the router's firmware, follow these instructions below:
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1. Download a most recent firmware upgrade file from our website (www.tp-link.com). 2. Enter or select the path name where you save the downloaded file on the computer into the File blank. 3. Click the Upgrade button. 4. The router will reboot while the upgrading has been finished. Note:
1) New firmware versions are posted at www.tp-link.com and can be downloaded for free. There is no need to upgrade the firmware unless the new firmware has a new feature you want to use. However, when experiencing problems caused by the router rather than the configuration, you can try to upgrade the firmware. 2) When you upgrade the router's firmware, you may lose its current configurations, so before upgrading the firmware please write down some of your customized settings to avoid losing important settings. 3) Do not turn off the router or press the Reset button while the firmware is being upgraded. Loss of power during the upgrade could damage the router. 4) The firmware version must correspond to the hardware. 5) The upgrade process takes a few moments and the router restarts automatically when the upgrade is complete. 4.21.4 Factory Defaults Choose menu System Tools Factory Defaults, and then and you can restore the configurations of the router to factory defaults on the following screen Figure 4-124 Restore Factory Default Click the Restore button to reset all configuration settings to their default values. The default User Name: admin The default Password: admin The default Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
- 120 -
Note:
All changed settings will be lost when defaults are restored. Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4.21.5 Backup & Restore Choose menu System Tools Backup & Restore, and then you can save the current configuration of the router as a backup file and restore the configuration via a backup file as shown in Figure 4-125. Figure 4-125 Backup & Restore Configuration Click the Backup button to save all configuration settings as a backup file in your local computer. To upgrade the router's configuration, follow these instructions. Click the Browse button to find the configuration file which you want to restore. Click the Restore button to update the configuration with the file whose path is the one you have input or selected in the blank. Note:
The current configuration will be covered with the uploading configuration file. Wrong process will lead the device unmanaged. The restoring process lasts for 20 seconds and the router will restart automatically then. Keep the power of the router on during the process, in case of any damage. 4.21.6 Reboot Choose menu System Tools Reboot, and then you can click the Reboot button to reboot the router via the next screen. Figure 4-126 Reboot the router
- 121 -
Some settings of the router will take effect only after rebooting, which include Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Change the LAN IP Address (system will reboot automatically). Change the DHCP Settings. Change the Wireless configurations. Change the Web Management Port. Upgrade the firmware of the router (system will reboot automatically). Restore the router's settings to factory defaults (system will reboot automatically). Update the configuration with the file (system will reboot automatically. 4.21.7 Password Choose menu System Tools Password, and then you can change the factory default user name and password of the router in the next screen as shown in Figure 4-127. Figure 4-127 Password It is strongly recommended that you should change the factory default user name and password of the router, because all users who try to access the router's Web-based utility or Quick Setup will be prompted for the router's default user name and password. Note:
The new user name and password must not exceed 14 characters in length and not include any spaces. Enter the new Password twice to confirm it. Click the Save button when finished. Click the Clear All button to clear all. 4.21.8 System Log Choose menu System Tools System Log, and then you can view the logs of the router.
- 122 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-128 System Log Auto Mail Feature - Indicates whether auto mail feature is enabled or not. Mail Settings - Set the receiving and sending mailbox address, server address, validation information as well as the timetable for Auto Mail Feature, as shown in Figure 4-129. Figure 4-129 Mail Account Settings From - Your mail box address. The router would connect it to send logs. To - Recipients address. The destination mailbox where the logs would be received. SMTP Server - Your smtp server. It corresponds with the mailbox filled in the From field. You can log on the relevant website for help if you are not clear with the address. Authentication - Most SMTP Server requires Authentication. It is required by most mailboxes that need User Name and Password to log in.
- 123 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Note:
Only when you select Authentication, do you have to enter the User Name and Password in the following fields. User Name - Your mail account name filled in the From field. The part behind @ is excluded. Password - Your mail account password. Confirm The Password - Enter the password again to confirm. Enable Auto Mail Feature - Select it to mail logs automatically. You could mail the current logs either at a specified time every day or by intervals, but only one could be the current effective rule. Enter the desired time or intervals in the corresponding field as shown in Figure 4-129. Click Save to keep your settings. Click Back to return to the previous page. Log Type - By selecting the log type, only logs of this type will be shown. Log Level - By selecting the log level, only logs of this level will be shown. Refresh - Refresh the page to show the latest log list. Save Log - Click to save all the logs in a txt file. Mail Log - Click to send an email of current logs manually according to the address and validation information set in Mail Settings. Clear Log - All the logs will be deleted from the router permanently, not just from the page. Click the Next button to go to the next page, or click the Previous button to return to the previous page. 4.21.9 Statistics Choose menu System Tools Statistics, and then you can view the statistics of the router, including total traffic and current traffic of the last Packets Statistic Interval.
- 124 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure 4-130 Statistics Current Statistics Status - Enable or Disable. The default value is disabled. To enable it, click the Enable button. If it is disabled, the function of DoS protection in Security settings will be disabled. Packets Statistics Interval 5-60 - The default value is 10. Select a value between 5 and 60 seconds in the drop-down list. The Packets Statistic interval indicates the time section of the packets statistic. Sorted Rules - Choose how the displayed statistics are sorted. Select the Auto-refresh checkbox to refresh automatically. Click the Refresh button to refresh immediately. Click Reset All to reset the values of all the entries to zero. Click Delete All to delete all entries in the table.
- 125 -
Statistics Table:
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router IP/MAC Address The IP and MAC address are displayed with related statistics. Packets The total number of packets received and transmitted by the router. Total Bytes The total number of bytes received and transmitted by the router. Current Packets The total number of packets received and transmitted in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds. Bytes ICMP Tx The total number of bytes received and transmitted in the last Packets Statistic interval seconds. The number of the ICMP packets transmitted to WAN per second at the specified Packets Statistics interval. It is shown like current transmitting rate / Max transmitting rate. UDP Tx The number of UDP packets transmitted to the WAN per second at the specified Packets Statistics interval. It is shown like current transmitting rate / Max transmitting rate. TCP SYN Tx The number of TCP SYN packets transmitted to the WAN per second at the specified Packets Statistics interval. It is shown like current transmitting rate / Max transmitting rate. Modify Reset Reset the value of he entry to zero. Delete Delete the existing entry in the table. There would be 5 entries on each page. Click Previous to return to the previous page and Next to the next page.
- 126 -
Appendix A: FAQ Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1. How do I configure the router to access Internet by ADSL users?
1) First, configure the ADSL Modem configured in RFC1483 bridge model. 2) Connect the Ethernet cable from your ADSL Modem to the Internet port on the router. The telephone cord plugs into the Line port of the ADSL Modem. 3) Login to the router, click the Network menu on the left of your browser, and click "WAN"
submenu. On the WAN page, select PPPoE/Russia PPPoE for WAN Connection Type. Type user name in the User Name field and password in the Password field, type password in the Confirm Password field again, finish by clicking Connect. Figure A-1 PPPoE Connection Type 4) If your ADSL lease is in pay-according-time mode, select Connect on Demand or Connect Manually for Internet connection mode. Type an appropriate number for Max Idle Time to avoid wasting paid time. Otherwise, you can select Auto-connecting for Internet connection mode. Figure A-2 PPPoE Connection Mode Note:
1. Sometimes the connection cannot be disconnected although you specify a time to Max Idle Time, since some applications is visiting the Internet continually in the background. If you are a Cable user, please configure the router following the above steps. 2.
- 127 -
2. How do I configure the router to access Internet by Ethernet users?
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 1) Login to the router, click the Network menu on the left of your browser, and click "WAN"
submenu. On the WAN page, select Dynamic IP for "WAN Connection Type", finish by clicking Save. 2) Some ISPs require that you register the MAC Address of your adapter, which is connected to your cable/DSL Modem during installation. If your ISP requires MAC register, login to the router and click the "Network" menu link on the left of your browser, and then click "MAC Clone" submenu link. On the "MAC Clone" page, if your PCs MAC address is proper MAC address, click the "Clone MAC Address" button and your PCs MAC address will fill in the "WAN MAC Address" field. Or else, type the MAC Address the MAC Address into is XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Then click the "Save" button. It will take effect after rebooting. the "WAN MAC Address"
field. The format for Figure A-3 MAC Clone 3. I want to use Netmeeting, what do I need to do?
1) If you start Netmeeting as a host, you dont need to do anything with the router. 2) If you start as a response, you need to configure Virtual Server or DMZ Host and make sure the H323 ALG is enabled. 3) How to configure Virtual Server: Log in to the router, click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser, and click "Virtual Servers" submenu. On the "Virtual Servers"
page, click Add New. Then on the Add or Modify a Virtual Server Entry page, enter 1720 for the Service Port blank, and your IP address for the IP Address blank, taking 192.168.0.169 for an example, remember to Enable and Save. Figure A-4 Virtual Servers
- 128 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Figure A-5 Add or Modify a Virtual server Entry Note:
Your opposite side should call your WAN IP, which is displayed on the Status page. 4) How to enable DMZ Host: Log in to the router, click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser, and click "DMZ" submenu. On the "DMZ" page, click Enable radio button and type your IP address into the DMZ Host IP Address field, using 192.168.0.169 as an example, remember to click the Save button. Figure A-6 DMZ 5) How to enable H323 ALG: Log in to the router, click the Security menu on the left of your browser, and click Basic Security submenu. On the Basic Security page, check the Enable radio button next to H323 ALG. Remember to click the Save button.
- 129 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 4. I want to build a WEB Server on the LAN, what should I do?
Figure A-7 Basic Security 1) Because the WEB Server port 80 will interfere with the WEB management port 80 on the router, you must change the WEB management port number to avoid interference. 2) To change the WEB management port number: Log in to the router, click the Security menu on the left of your browser, and click "Remote Management" submenu. On the
"Remote Management" page, type a port number except 80, such as 88, into the "Web Management Port" field. Click Save and reboot the router. Figure A-8 Remote Management Note:
If the above configuration takes effect, you can visit and configure the router by typing http://192.168.0.1:88 (the routers LAN IP address: Web Management Port) in the address
- 130 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router field of the Web browser. If the LAN IP of the modem connected with your router is 192.168.0.x, the default LAN IP of the router will automatically switch from 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.1.1 to avoid IP conflict; in this case, please try http://192.168.1.1:88. 3) Log in to the router, click the Forwarding menu on the left of your browser, and click the "Virtual Servers" submenu. On the "Virtual Servers" page, click Add New, then on the Add or Modify a Virtual Server page, enter 80 into the blank next to the Service Port, and your IP address next to the IP Address, assuming 192.168.0.188 for an example, remember to Enable and Save. Figure A-9 Virtual Servers Figure A-10 Add or Modify a Virtual server Entry 5. The wireless stations cannot connect to the router. 1) Make sure the "Wireless router Radio" is enabled. 2) Make sure that the wireless stations' SSID accord with the router's SSID. 3) Make sure the wireless stations have right KEY for encryption when the router is encrypted. 4) If the wireless connection is ready, but you cant access the router, check the IP Address of your wireless stations.
- 131 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Appendix B: Configuring the PCs In this section, well introduce how to install and configure the TCP/IP correctly in Windows XP. First make sure your Ethernet Adapter is working, refer to the adapters manual if needed. 1. Install TCP/IP component 1) On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel. 2) Click the Network and Internet Connections icon, and then click on the Network Connections tab in the appearing window. 3) Right click the icon that showed below, select Properties on the prompt page. Figure B-1 4) In the prompt page that showed below, double click on the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Figure B-2
- 132 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router 5) The following TCP/IP Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on this window by default. 6) Select Obtain an IP address automatically and Obtain DNS server automatically, as shown in the Figure below:
Figure B-3
- 133 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Appendix C: Specifications General Standards Protocols Ports Cabling Type LEDs Safety & Emissions Wireless Frequency Band*
Radio Data Rate IEEE 802.11ac, IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11e, IEEE 802.11i, IEEE 802.1X, IEEE 802.3X, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u, IEEE 802.3ab TCP/IP, PPPoE, DHCP, ICMP, NAT, SNTP 1 10/100/1000M Auto-Negotiation Internet RJ45 port;
4 10/100/1000M Auto-Negotiation Ethernet RJ45 ports supporting Auto MDI/MDIX;
2 USB ports supporting storage/FTP/Media/Print Server;
10BASE-T: UTP category 3, 4, 5 cable (maximum 100m) EIA/TIA-568 100 STP (maximum 100m) 100BASE-TX: UTP category 5, 5e cable (maximum 100m) EIA/TIA-568 100 STP (maximum 100m) 1000BASE-TX: UTP category 5, 5e cable (maximum 100m) EIA/TIA-568 100 STP (maximum 100m) Power, System, Wireless 2.4GHz, Wireless 5GHz, Ethernet (1-4), Internet, WPS FCC, CE 2.4GHz, 5GHz 11b: 1/2/5.5/11Mbps 11a/g: 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54/Mbps 11n: 45/90/135/180/270/360/405/450Mbps 11ac: up to 1.3Gbps Frequency Expansion DSSS (Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum) Modulation Security Sensitivity @PER 11ac: 256-QAM for OFDM 11n/g/a: QPSK,BPSK,16-QAM, 64-QAM for OFDM 11b: CCK,DQPSK,DBPSK WEP, WPA/WPA2, WPA2-PSK/WPA-PSK 5G 2.4G 11a 6Mbps-96dBm 11g 54M-77dBm 11a 54Mbps-79dBm 11n HT20-74dmB 11ac HT20-71dBm 11n HT40-72dBm 11ac HT40-66dBm 11ac HT80-63dBm Environmental and Physical Temperature Humidity Operating: 0~40 (32~104) Storage: -40~70 (-40~158) Operating: 10% - 90% RH, Non-condensing Storage: 5% - 90% RH, Non-condensing
* Only 2.412GHz~2.462GHz is allowed to be used in USA, which means only channel 1~11 is available for American users to choose.
- 134 -
Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router Appendix D: Glossary 802.11ac - IEEE 802.11ac is a wireless computer networking standard of 802.11.This specification will enable multi-station WLAN throughput of at least 1 gigabit per second .This is accomplished by extending the air interface concepts embraced by 802.11n: wider RF bandwidth, more MIMO spatial streams, multi-user MIMO, and high-density modulation (up to 256 QAM). 802.11n - 802.11n builds upon previous 802.11 standards by adding MIMO (multiple-input multiple-output). MIMO uses multiple transmitter and receiver antennas to allow for increased data throughput via spatial multiplexing and increased range by exploiting the spatial diversity, perhaps through coding schemes like Alamouti coding. The Enhanced Wireless Consortium
(EWC) [3] was formed to help accelerate the IEEE 802.11n development process and promote a technology specification for interoperability of next-generation wireless local area networking (WLAN) products. 802.11b - The 802.11b standard specifies a wireless networking at 11 Mbps using direct-sequence spread-spectrum (DSSS) technology and operating in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2.4GHz, and WEP encryption for security. 802.11b networks are also referred to as Wi-Fi networks. 802.11g - specification for wireless networking at 54 Mbps using direct-sequence spread-spectrum (DSSS) technology, using OFDM modulation and operating in the unlicensed radio spectrum at 2.4GHz, and backward compatibility with IEEE 802.11b devices, and WEP encryption for security. DDNS (Dynamic Domain Name System) - The capability of assigning a fixed host and domain name to a dynamic Internet IP Address. DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) - A protocol that automatically configure the TCP/IP parameters for the all the PC(s) that are connected to a DHCP server. DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) - A Demilitarized Zone allows one local host to be exposed to the Internet for a special-purpose service such as Internet gaming or videoconferencing. DNS (Domain Name System) - An Internet Service that translates the names of websites into IP addresses. Domain Name - A descriptive name for an address or group of addresses on the Internet. DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) - A technology that allows data to be sent or received over existing traditional phone lines. ISP (Internet Service Provider) - A company that provides access to the Internet.
- 135 -
MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) - The size in bytes of the largest packet that can be Archer C7 AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router transmitted. NAT (Network Address Translation) - NAT technology translates IP addresses of a local area network to a different IP address for the Internet. PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) - PPPoE is a protocol for connecting remote hosts to the Internet over an always-on connection by simulating a dial-up connection. SSID - A Service Set Identification is a thirty-two character (maximum) alphanumeric key identifying a wireless local area network. For the wireless devices in a network to communicate with each other, all devices must be configured with the same SSID. This is typically the configuration parameter for a wireless PC card. It corresponds to the ESSID in the wireless Access Point and to the wireless network name. WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) - A data privacy mechanism based on a 64-bit or 128-bit or 152-bit shared key algorithm, as described in the IEEE 802.11 standard. Wi-Fi - A trade name for the 802.11b wireless networking standard, given by the Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA, see http://www.wi-fi.net), an industry standards group promoting interoperability among 802.11b devices. WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) - A group of computers and associated devices communicate with each other wirelessly, which network serving users are limited in a local area.
- 136 -
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report (NII) rev 3 | Test Report | 1.44 MiB |
FCC TEST REPORT (15.407) REPORT NO.: RF130829C04-1 MODEL NO.: C7 FCC ID: TE7C7V2 RECEIVED: Aug. 27, 2013 TESTED: Dec. 06, 2013 ~ Mar. 05, 2014 ISSUED: Mar. 06, 2014 APPLICANT: TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. ADDRESS: Building 24 (floors 1,3,4,5) and 28 (floors1-4) Central Science and Technology Park, Shennan Rd, Nanshan, Shenzhen, China ISSUED BY: Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services
(H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch LAB ADDRESS: No. 47, 14th Ling, Chia Pau Vil., Lin Kou Dist., New Taipei City, Taiwan, R.O.C. TEST LOCATION: No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd, Wen Hwa Tsuen, Kwei Shan Hsiang, Taoyuan Hsien 333, Taiwan, R.O.C. This report should not be used by the client to claim product certification, approval, or endorsement by TAF or any government agencies. This report is for your exclusive use. Any copying or replication of this report to or for any other person or entity, or use of our name or trademark, is permitted only with our prior written permission. This report sets forth our findings solely with respect to the test samples identified herein. The results set forth in this report are not indicative or representative of the quality or characteristics of the lot from which a test sample was taken or any similar or identical product unless specifically and expressly noted. Our report includes all of the tests requested by you and the results thereof based upon the information that you provided to us. You have 60 days from date of issuance of this report to notify us of any material error or omission caused by our negligence, provided, however, that such notice shall be in writing and shall specifically address the issue you wish to raise. A failure to raise such issue within the prescribed time shall constitute your unqualified acceptance of the completeness of this report, the tests conducted and the correctness of the report contents. Unless specific mention, the uncertainty of measurement has been explicitly taken into account to declare the compliance or non-compliance to the specification. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 1 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS RELEASE CONTROL RECORD .......................................................................................... 4 CERTIFICATION....................................................................................................... 5 1. 2. SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS .............................................................................. 6 2.1 MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY ............................................................................ 6 GENERAL INFORMATION ....................................................................................... 7 3. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF EUT ......................................................................... 7 3.1 3.2 DESCRIPTION OF TEST MODES ........................................................................... 9 3.2.1 TEST MODE APPLICABILITY AND TESTED CHANNEL DETAIL ......................... 10 DUTY CYCLE OF TEST SIGNAL ........................................................................... 12 3.3 3.4 DESCRIPTION OF SUPPORT UNITS ................................................................... 16 3.4.1 CONFIGURATION OF SYSTEM UNDER TEST .................................................... 16 3.5 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF APPLIED STANDARDS ........................................ 17 TEST TYPES AND RESULTS ................................................................................ 18 4. 4.1 RADIATED EMISSION AND BANDEDGE MEASUREMENT ................................. 18 4.1.1 LIMITS OF RADIATED EMISSION AND BANDEDGE MEASUREMENT .............. 18 4.1.2 LIMITS OF UNWANTED EMISSION OUT OF THE RESTRICTED BANDS .......... 18 4.1.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................................ 19 4.1.4 TEST PROCEDURES ............................................................................................ 20 4.1.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD .................................................................. 20 4.1.6 TEST SETUP .......................................................................................................... 21 4.1.7 EUT OPERATING CONDITION .............................................................................. 22 4.1.8 TEST RESULTS ..................................................................................................... 23 4.2 CONDUCTED EMISSION MEASUREMENT ......................................................... 33 4.2.1 LIMITS OF CONDUCTED EMISSION MEASUREMENT ....................................... 33 4.2.2 TEST INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................................ 33 4.2.3 TEST PROCEDURES ............................................................................................ 34 4.2.4 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD .................................................................. 34 4.2.5 TEST SETUP .......................................................................................................... 34 4.2.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 34 4.2.7 TEST RESULTS ..................................................................................................... 35 4.3 PEAK TRANSMIT POWER MEASUREMENT ....................................................... 37 4.3.1 LIMITS OF PEAK TRANSMIT POWER MEASUREMENT ..................................... 37 4.3.2 TEST SETUP .......................................................................................................... 37 4.3.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................................ 38 4.3.4 TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................................................... 38 4.3.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD .................................................................. 39 4.3.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 39 4.3.7 TEST RESULTS ..................................................................................................... 40 4.4 PEAK POWER SPECTRAL DENSITY MEASUREMENT ...................................... 45 4.4.1 LIMITS OF PEAK POWER SPECTRAL DENSITY MEASUREMENT .................... 45 4.4.2 TEST SETUP .......................................................................................................... 45 4.4.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................................ 45 4.4.4 TEST PROCEDURES ............................................................................................ 45 4.4.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD .................................................................. 45 4.4.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 45 4.4.7 TEST RESULTS ..................................................................................................... 46 4.5 PEAK POWER EXCURSION MEASUREMENT .................................................... 49 4.5.1 LIMITS OF PEAK POWER EXCURSION MEASUREMENT .................................. 49 4.5.2 TEST SETUP .......................................................................................................... 49 4.5.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................................ 49 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 2 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.5.4 TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................................................... 49 4.5.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD .................................................................. 49 4.5.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 49 4.5.7 TEST RESULTS ..................................................................................................... 50 4.6 FREQUENCY STABILITY ....................................................................................... 51 4.6.1 LIMITS OF FREQUENCY STABILITY MEASUREMENT ....................................... 51 4.6.2 TEST SETUP .......................................................................................................... 51 4.6.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................................ 51 4.6.4 TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................................................... 52 4.6.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD .................................................................. 52 4.6.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITION .............................................................................. 52 4.6.7 TEST RESULTS ..................................................................................................... 53 4.7 20dBC BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT ................................................................. 54 4.7.1 LIMITS OF PEAK TRANSMIT POWER MEASUREMENT ..................................... 54 4.7.2 TEST SETUP .......................................................................................................... 54 4.7.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS ............................................................................................ 54 4.7.4 TEST PROCEDURE ............................................................................................... 54 4.7.5 TEST RESULTS ..................................................................................................... 55 5. PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE TEST CONFIGURATION ............................................. 61 INFORMATION ON THE TESTING LABORATORIES ........................................... 62 6. 7. APPENDIX A MODIFICATIONS RECORDERS FOR ENGINEERING CHANGES TO THE EUT BY THE LAB................................................................................................. 63 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 3 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 RELEASE CONTROL RECORD ISSUE NO. RF130829C04-1 Original release REASON FOR CHANGE DATE ISSUED Mar. 06, 2014 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 4 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 1. CERTIFICATION PRODUCT: AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router MODEL: C7 BRAND: TP-LINK APPLICANT: TP-LINK TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD. TESTED: Dec. 06, 2013 ~ Mar. 05, 2014 TEST SAMPLE: PRODUCTION SAMPLE STANDARDS: FCC Part 15, Subpart E (Section 15.407) ANSI C63.10-2009 The above equipment (model: C7) has been tested by Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch, and found compliance with the requirement of the above standards. The test record, data evaluation & Equipment Under Test (EUT) configurations represented herein are true and accurate accounts of the measurements of the samples EMC characteristics under the conditions specified in this report. PREPARED BY :
, DATE :
Mar. 06, 2014 Celine Chou / Specialist APPROVED BY :
, DATE :
Mar. 06, 2014 Ken Liu / Senior Manager Report No.: RF130829C04-1 5 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 2. SUMMARY OF TEST RESULTS The EUT has been tested according to the following specifications:
APPLIED STANDARD: FCC PART 15, SUBPART E (SECTION 15.407) STANDARD SECTION TEST TYPE RESULT REMARK 15.407(b)(6) AC Power Conducted Emission PASS 15.407(b/1/2/3)
(b)(6) Radiated Emissions PASS Meet the requirement of limit. Minimum passing margin is
-19.15dB at 0.15782MHz. Meet the requirement of limit. Minimum passing margin is
-1.0dB at 5150.00MHz. 15.407(a/1/2) Max Average Transmit Power 15.407(a)(6) Peak Power Excursion 15.407(a/1/2) Peak Power Spectral Density 15.407(g) Frequency Stability PASS Meet the requirement of limit. PASS Meet the requirement of limit. PASS Meet the requirement of limit. PASS Meet the requirement of limit. 15.203 Antenna Requirement PASS No antenna connector for PIFA antenna and RP-SMA-F antenna connector for Dipole antenna is not standard connector. 2.1 MEASUREMENT UNCERTAINTY Where relevant, the following measurement uncertainty levels have been estimated for tests performed on the EUT as specified in CISPR 16-4-2:
MEASUREMENT Conducted emissions Radiated emissions FREQUENCY 9kHz~30MHz 30MHz ~ 200MHz 200MHz ~1000MHz 1GHz ~ 18GHz 18GHz ~ 40GHz UNCERTAINTY 2.44 dB 3.34 dB 3.35 dB 2.26 dB 1.94 dB This uncertainty represents an expanded uncertainty expressed at approximately the 95% confidence level using a coverage factor of k = 2. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 6 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 3. GENERAL INFORMATION 3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF EUT EUT MODEL NO. POWER SUPPLY MODULATION TYPE MODULATION TECHNOLOGY OFDM AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router C7 12Vdc (Adapter) 256QAM, 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, BPSK TRANSFER RATE OPERATING FREQUENCY NUMBER OF CHANNEL 802.11a: 54.0/ 48.0/ 36.0/ 24.0/ 18.0/ 12.0/ 9.0/ 6.0Mbps 802.11n: up to 450.0Mbps 802.11ac: up to 1300.0Mbps 5180 ~ 5240MHz 4 for 802.11a, 802.11n (20MHz) 2 for 802.11n (40MHz) 1 for 802.11ac (80MHz) 46.873mW Refer to note Refer to note NA Refer to users manual Adapter OUTPUT POWER ANTENNA TYPE ANTENNA CONNECTOR DATA CABLE I/O PORTS ACCESSORY DEVICES NOTE:
1. The EUT incorporates a MIMO function. Physically, the EUT provides three completed transmitters and three receivers. MODULATION MODE TX FUNCTION 802.11b 802.11g 802.11a 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 802.11ac (80MHz) 3TX 3TX 3TX 3TX 3TX 3TX 2. The EUT with follow antennas gain is listed as table below. Frequency 2.4GHz 5GHz Ant. 1 2 3 4 ~ 6 Type PIFA PIFA PIFA Dipole Gain(dBi) Connector 3.81 2.44 3.67 4.1 NA NA NA RP-SMA-F Report No.: RF130829C04-1 7 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 3. The EUT consumes power from the following adapter. BRAND: Ten Pao International Inc. MODEL: S040EU1200250 INPUT: 100-240Vac, 50/60Hz, 1.2A Max OUTPUT: 12Vdc, 2500mA POWER LINE: 1.5m cable without core attached on adapter 4. The above EUT information is declared by manufacturer and for more detailed features description, please refer to the manufacturer's specifications or user's manual. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 8 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 3.2 DESCRIPTION OF TEST MODES FOR 5180 ~ 5240MHz 4 channels are provided for 802.11a, 802.11n (20MHz):
CHANNEL FREQUENCY CHANNEL 36 40 5180 MHz 5200 MHz 44 48 FREQUENCY 5220 MHz 5240 MHz 2 channels are provided for 802.11n (40MHz):
CHANNEL 38 FREQUENCY 5190 MHz CHANNEL 46 FREQUENCY 5230 MHz 1 channel is provided for 802.11ac (80MHz):
CHANNEL 42 FREQUENCY 5210MHz Report No.: RF130829C04-1 9 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 3.2.1 TEST MODE APPLICABILITY AND TESTED CHANNEL DETAIL EUT CONFIGURE MODE APPLICABLE TO RE1G RE<1G PLC APCM DESCRIPTION
-
Where NOTE: The EUT had been pre-tested on the positioned of each 3 axis. The worst case was found when positioned on X-plane. RE<1G: Radiated Emission below 1GHz APCM: Antenna Port Conducted Measurement RE1G: Radiated Emission above 1GHz PLC: Power Line Conducted Emission
-
RADIATED EMISSION TEST (ABOVE 1GHz):
Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. EUT CONFIGURE MODE MODE AVAILABLE CHANNEL TESTED CHANNEL MODULATION TECHNOLOGY
-
-
-
-
802.11a 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 36 to 48 36 to 48 38 to 46 802.11ac (80MHz) 42 36, 40, 48 36, 40, 48 38, 46 42 OFDM OFDM OFDM OFDM MODULATION DATA RATE TYPE BPSK BPSK BPSK BPSK
(Mbps) 6.0 7.2 15.0 32.5 RADIATED EMISSION TEST (BELOW 1GHz):
Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. EUT CONFIGURE MODE MODE AVAILABLE CHANNEL TESTED CHANNEL MODULATION TECHNOLOGY
-
802.11n (40MHz) 38 to 46 46 OFDM MODULATION DATA RATE TYPE BPSK
(Mbps) 15.0 POWER LINE CONDUCTED EMISSION TEST:
Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. EUT CONFIGURE MODE MODE AVAILABLE CHANNEL TESTED CHANNEL MODULATION TECHNOLOGY
-
802.11n (40MHz) 38 to 46 46 OFDM MODULATION DATA RATE TYPE BPSK
(Mbps) 15.0 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 10 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 ANTENNA PORT CONDUCTED MEASUREMENT:
This item includes all test value of each mode, but only includes spectrum plot of worst value of each mode. Pre-Scan has been conducted to determine the worst-case mode from all possible combinations between available modulations, data rates and antenna ports (if EUT with antenna diversity architecture). Following channel(s) was (were) selected for the final test as listed below. EUT CONFIGURE MODE MODE AVAILABLE CHANNEL TESTED CHANNEL MODULATION TECHNOLOGY
-
-
-
-
802.11a 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 36 to 48 36 to 48 38 to 46 802.11ac (80MHz) 42 36, 40, 48 36, 40, 48 38, 46 42 OFDM OFDM OFDM OFDM MODULATION DATA RATE TYPE BPSK BPSK BPSK BPSK
(Mbps) 6.0 7.2 15.0 32.5 TEST CONDITION:
APPLICABLE TO ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS RE1G RE<1G PLC APCM 25deg. C, 65%RH 25deg. C, 65%RH 24deg. C, 64%RH 25deg. C, 60%RH INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz 120Vac, 60Hz 120Vac, 60Hz 120Vac, 60Hz TESTED BY Chris Lin Chris Lin Match Tsui Nick Chen Report No.: RF130829C04-1 11 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 3.3 DUTY CYCLE OF TEST SIGNAL MODULATION TYPE: BPSK 802.11a: Duty cycle = 2.027/2.086 = 0.972, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.972) = 0.12 802.11n (20MHz): Duty cycle = 1.886/1.946 = 0.969, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.969) = 0.14 802.11n (40MHz): Duty cycle = 0.927/0.982 = 0.944, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.944) = 0.25 802.11ac (80MHz): Duty cycle = 0.449/0.509 = 0.882, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.882) = 0.54 802.11a 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 802.11ac (80MHz) Report No.: RF130829C04-1 12 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 MODULATION TYPE: QPSK 802.11a: Duty cycle = 1.021/1.077 = 0.948, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.948) = 0.23 802.11n (20MHz): Duty cycle = 0.960/1.029 = 0.933, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.933) = 0.30 802.11n (40MHz): Duty cycle = 0.482/0.542 = 0.889, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.889) = 0.51 802.11ac (80MHz): Duty cycle = 0.247/0.305 = 0.810, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.810) = 0.92 802.11a 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 802.11ac (80MHz) Report No.: RF130829C04-1 13 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 MODULATION TYPE: 16QAM 802.11a: Duty cycle = 0.522/0.579 = 0.902, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.902) = 0.45 802.11n (20MHz): Duty cycle = 0.500/0.556 = 0.899, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.899) = 0.46 802.11n (40MHz): Duty cycle = 0.259/0.316 = 0.820, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.820) = 0.86 802.11ac (80MHz): Duty cycle = 0.144/0.199 = 0.724, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.724) = 1.40 802.11a 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 802.11ac (80MHz) Report No.: RF130829C04-1 14 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 MODULATION TYPE: 64QAM 802.11a: Duty cycle = 0.270/0.331 = 0.816, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.816) = 0.88 802.11n (20MHz): Duty cycle = 0.265/0.324 = 0.818, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.818) = 0.87 802.11n (40MHz): Duty cycle = 0.148/0.213 = 0.695, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.695) = 1.58 802.11ac (80MHz): Duty cycle = 0.092/0.148 = 0.622, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.622) = 2.06 802.11a 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 802.11ac (80MHz) MODULATION TYPE: 256QAM 802.11ac (80MHz): Duty cycle = 0.075/0.131 = 0.568, Duty factor = 10 * log( 1/0.568) = 2.46 802.11ac (80MHz) Report No.: RF130829C04-1 15 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 3.4 DESCRIPTION OF SUPPORT UNITS The EUT has been tested as an independent unit together with other necessary accessories or support units. The following support units or accessories were used to form a representative test configuration during the tests. NO. 1 2 3 PRODUCT USB Flash Drive USB Flash Drive Notebook BRAND Transcend Lenovo DELL MODEL NO. V85 F310 E5410 FCC ID SERIAL NO. 538455 4490 FCC DoC Approved OA0427594500756 FCC DoC Approved FCC DoC Approved 6RP2YM1 SIGNAL CABLE DESCRIPTION OF THE ABOVE SUPPORT UNITS NO. 1 2 3 NA NA 3m LAN cable NOTE: All power cords of the above support units are non-shielded (1.8m). 3.4.1 CONFIGURATION OF SYSTEM UNDER TEST 1.8m RJ45 UTP cable x 4 with load USB Flash x 2 EUT
(Power from adapter)
*Test table 10m RJ45 UTP cable Notebook
*Kept in a remote area Report No.: RF130829C04-1 16 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 3.5 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF APPLIED STANDARDS The EUT is a RF Product. According to the specifications of the manufacturer, it must comply with the requirements of the following standards:
FCC Part 15, Subpart E (15.407) 789033 D01 General UNII Test Procedures v01 r03 662911 D01 Multiple Transmitter Output v02r01 ANSI C63.10-2009 All test items have been performed and recorded as per the above standards. NOTE: The EUT is also considered as a kind of computer peripheral, because the connection to computer is necessary for typical use. It has been verified to comply with the requirements of FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B (DoC). The test report has been issued separately. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 17 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4. TEST TYPES AND RESULTS 4.1 RADIATED EMISSION AND BANDEDGE MEASUREMENT 4.1.1 LIMITS OF RADIATED EMISSION AND BANDEDGE MEASUREMENT Radiated emissions which fall in the restricted bands must comply with the radiated emission limits specified as below table:
FREQUENCIES
(MHz) FIELD STRENGTH
(microvolts/meter) MEASUREMENT DISTANCE
(meters) 0.009 ~ 0.490 0.490 ~ 1.705 1.705 ~ 30.0 30 ~ 88 88 ~ 216 216 ~ 960 Above 960 2400/F(kHz) 24000/F(kHz) 30 100 150 200 500 300 30 30 3 3 3 3 NOTE:
1. The lower limit shall apply at the transition frequencies. 2. Emission level (dBuV/m) = 20 log Emission level (uV/m). 3. For frequencies above 1000MHz, the field strength limits are based on average detector, however, the peak field strength of any emission shall not exceed the maximum permitted average limits, specified above by more than 20dB under any condition of modulation. 4.1.2 LIMITS OF UNWANTED EMISSION OUT OF THE RESTRICTED BANDS APPLICABLE TO LIMIT FIELD STRENGTH AT 3m (dBV/m) PK 74 AV 54 EIRP LIMIT (dBm) EQUIVALENT FIELD STRENGTH AT 3m
(dBV/m) PK
-27 PK 68.3 NOTE: The following formula is used to convert the equipment isotropic radiated power (eirp) to field strength:
E =
30 P 1000000 3 V/m, where P is the eirp (Watts). Report No.: RF130829C04-1 18 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.1.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS DESCRIPTION &
MANUFACTURER Test Receiver ROHDE & SCHWARZ Spectrum Analyzer ROHDE & SCHWARZ BILOG Antenna SCHWARZBECK HORN Antenna SCHWARZBECK HORN Antenna SCHWARZBECK Preamplifier Agilent Preamplifier Agilent RF signal cable HUBER+SUHNNER RF signal cable HUBER+SUHNNER Software BV ADT Antenna Tower inn-co GmbH Antenna Tower Controller inn-co GmbH Turn Table BV ADT Turn Table Controller BV ADT 26GHz ~ 40GHz Amplifier High Speed Peak Power Meter Power Sensor WIT Standard Temperature And Humidity Chamber MODEL NO. SERIAL NO. ESIB7 FSP40 100187 100039 VULB9168 9168-160 DATE OF DUE DATE OF CALIBRATION CALIBRATION Jan. 02, 2013 Jan. 01, 2014 Jan. 02, 2014 Jan. 01, 2015 Jan. 31, 2013 Jan. 30, 2014 Jan. 31, 2014 Jan. 30, 2015 Mar. 20, 2013 Mar. 19, 2014 9120D BBHA 9170 8447D 8449B 209 148 Sep. 12, 2013 Sep. 11, 2014 Jul. 15, 2013 Jul. 14, 2014 2944A10633 Oct. 07, 2013 Oct. 06, 2014 3008A01964 Aug. 26, 2013 Aug. 25, 2014 SUCOFLEX 104 214378/4 Aug. 26, 2013 Aug. 25, 2014 SUCOFLEX 106 ADT_Radiated_ V7.6.15.9.4 MA 4000 CO2000 TT100 SC100 EM26400 ML2495A MA2411B TH-4S-C 12738/6+309224/
4 NA 013303 017303 TT93021703 SC93021703 815221 0824012 0738171 W981030 Aug. 26, 2013 Aug. 25, 2014 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA Oct. 18, 2013 Oct. 17, 2014 Aug. 22, 2013 Aug. 21, 2014 Jul. 30, 2013 Jul. 29, 2014 Jun. 12, 2014 Jun. 13, 2013 NOTE: 1. The calibration interval of the above test instruments is 12 months and the calibrations are traceable to NML/ROC and NIST/USA. 2. The test was performed in HwaYa Chamber 3. 3. The horn antenna and HP preamplifier (model: 8449B) are used only for the measurement of emission frequency above 1GHz if tested. 4. The FCC Site Registration No. is 988962. 5. The IC Site Registration No. is IC 7450F-3. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 19 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.1.4 TEST PROCEDURES a. The EUT was placed on the top of a rotating table 0.8 meters above the ground at a 3 meter semi-anechoic camber. The table was rotated 360 degrees to determine the position of the highest radiation. b. The EUT was set 3 meters away from the interference-receiving antenna, which was mounted on the top of a variable-height antenna tower. c. The antenna is a broadband antenna, and its height is varied from one meter to four meters above the ground to determine the maximum value of the field strength. Both horizontal and vertical polarizations of the antenna are set to make the measurement. d. For each suspected emission, the EUT was arranged to its worst case and then the antenna was tuned to heights from 1 meter to 4 meters and the rotatable table was turned from 0 degrees to 360 degrees to find the maximum reading. e. The test-receiver system was set to Peak Detect Function and Specified Bandwidth with Maximum Hold Mode. f. If the emission level of the EUT in peak mode was 10dB lower than the limit specified, then testing could be stopped and the peak values of the EUT would be reported. Otherwise the emissions that did not have 10dB margin would be re-tested one by one using peak, quasi-peak or average method as specified and then reported in a data sheet. NOTE:
1. The resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 120kHz for Quasi-peak detection at frequency below 1GHz. 2. The resolution bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 1MHz and video bandwidth is 3MHz for Peak detection at frequency above 1GHz. 3. The resolution bandwidth of test receiver/spectrum analyzer is 1MHz and the video bandwidth is 1/T(Duty cycle < 98%) or 10Hz(Duty cycle > 98%) for Average detection (AV) at frequency above 1GHz. 4. All modes of operation were investigated and the worst-case emissions are reported. 4.1.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD No deviation. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 20 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.1.6 TEST SETUP Frequency range 30MHz~1GHz Frequency range above 1GHz For the actual test configuration, please refer to the attached file (Test Setup Photo). Report No.: RF130829C04-1 21 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.1.7 EUT OPERATING CONDITION a. Placed the EUT on the testing table. b. Prepared notebook to act as a communication partner and placed it outside of testing area. c. The communication partner connected with EUT via a RJ45 cable and ran a test program (provided by manufacturer) to enable EUT under transmission condition continuously at specific channel frequency. d. The communication partner sent data to EUT by command "PING". Report No.: RF130829C04-1 22 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.1.8 TEST RESULTS ABOVE 1GHz DATA 802.11a EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 36 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0
-17.7
-10.2 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) ANTENNA HEIGHT 156 156 135 135 54 54 TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.20 H 1.20 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.36 H 1.36 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 56.3 PK 51.20 43.8 AV 38.70 98.6 PK 60.90 88.4 AV 50.70 58.1 PK 40.60 47.2 AV 29.70 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 51.40 40.60 75.20 65.50 43.00 31.60 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 56.5 PK 45.7 AV 112.9 PK 103.2 AV 60.5 PK 49.1 AV
(m) 1.17 V 1.17 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.08 V 1.08 V TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) 150 150 356 356 64 64 ANTENNA HEIGHT LIMIT
(dBuV/m)
-13.5
-4.9
-15.9
-6.8
-17.5
-8.3 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 MARGIN
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 5.10 5.10 37.70 37.70 17.50 17.50 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 5.10 5.10 37.70 37.70 17.50 17.50 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 5150.00 5150.00
*5180.00
*5180.00
#10360.00
#10360.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 5150.00 5150.00
*5180.00
*5180.00
#10360.00
#10360.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 23 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 40 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN 74.0 54.0 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) ANTENNA HEIGHT TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.23 H 1.23 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION RAW LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 100.2 PK 62.40 89.2 AV 51.40 57.8 PK 40.00 46.8 AV 29.00 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 73.70 63.80 42.10 31.00 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 111.5 PK 101.6 AV 59.9 PK 48.8 AV
(m) 1.10 V 1.10 V 1.06 V 1.06 V TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) ANTENNA HEIGHT LIMIT
(dBuV/m) 136 136 228 228 357 357 87 87
-16.2
-7.2
-14.1
-5.2 74.0 54.0 MARGIN
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.80 37.80 17.80 17.80 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.80 37.80 17.80 17.80 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4
*5200.00
*5200.00
#10400.00
#10400.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4
*5200.00
*5200.00
#10400.00
#10400.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 24 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 48 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN LIMIT
(dBuV/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 ANTENNA HEIGHT
-18.0
-9.9
-14.7
-6.0 18 18 30 30 147 147 TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.10 H 1.10 H 1.33 H 1.33 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION RAW LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 98.3 PK 60.40 88.2 AV 50.30 56.0 PK 50.60 44.1 AV 38.70 59.3 PK 41.00 48.0 AV 29.70 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 75.80 65.60 51.50 40.60 42.60 31.20 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 113.7 PK 103.5 AV 56.9 PK 46.0 AV 60.9 PK 49.5 AV
(m) 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.34 V 1.34 V 1.15 V 1.15 V TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) 355 355 5 5 207 207
-17.1
-8.0
-13.1
-4.5 ANTENNA HEIGHT 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) MARGIN
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.90 37.90 5.40 5.40 18.30 18.30 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.90 37.90 5.40 5.40 18.30 18.30 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6
*5240.00
*5240.00 5350.00 5350.00
#10480.00
#10480.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6
*5240.00
*5240.00 5350.00 5350.00
#10480.00
#10480.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 25 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11n (20MHz) EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 36 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0
-18.3
-10.3 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) ANTENNA HEIGHT 215 215 207 207 236 236 TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.10 H 1.10 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.52 H 1.52 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION RAW LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 55.7 PK 50.60 43.7 AV 38.60 99.6 PK 61.90 89.8 AV 52.10 57.8 PK 40.30 47.7 AV 30.20 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 61.20 40.70 75.50 65.10 42.70 31.20 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 66.3 PK 45.8 AV 113.2 PK 102.8 AV 60.2 PK 48.7 AV
(m) 1.10 V 1.10 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.15 V 1.15 V TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) 340 340 358 358 87 87 ANTENNA HEIGHT LIMIT
(dBuV/m)
-16.2
-6.3
-13.8
-5.3 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 MARGIN
-7.7
-8.2
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 5.10 5.10 37.70 37.70 17.50 17.50 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 5.10 5.10 37.70 37.70 17.50 17.50 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 5150.00 5150.00
*5180.00
*5180.00
#10360.00
#10360.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 5150.00 5150.00
*5180.00
*5180.00
#10360.00
#10360.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 26 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 40 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN 74.0 54.0 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) ANTENNA HEIGHT TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.32 H 1.32 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION RAW LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 100.2 PK 62.40 89.9 AV 52.10 58.1 PK 40.30 47.7 AV 29.90 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 75.40 65.40 42.60 32.00 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 113.2 PK 103.2 AV 60.4 PK 49.8 AV
(m) 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.17 V 1.17 V TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) ANTENNA HEIGHT LIMIT
(dBuV/m) 358 358 146 146 127 127 45 45
-13.6
-4.2
-15.9
-6.3 74.0 54.0 MARGIN
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.80 37.80 17.80 17.80 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.80 37.80 17.80 17.80 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4
*5200.00
*5200.00
#10400.00
#10400.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4
*5200.00
*5200.00
#10400.00
#10400.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 27 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 48 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN LIMIT
(dBuV/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 ANTENNA HEIGHT
-17.5
-9.9
-15.4
-7.1 127 127 140 140 208 208 TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.16 H 1.16 H 1.16 H 1.16 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION RAW LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 99.0 PK 61.10 89.1 AV 51.20 56.5 PK 51.10 44.1 AV 38.70 58.6 PK 40.30 46.9 AV 28.60 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 75.70 65.00 52.60 41.30 42.60 31.50 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 113.6 PK 102.9 AV 58.0 PK 46.7 AV 60.9 PK 49.8 AV
(m) 1.08 V 1.08 V 1.20 V 1.20 V 1.18 V 1.18 V TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) 353 353 340 340 54 54
-16.0
-7.3
-13.1
-4.2 ANTENNA HEIGHT 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) MARGIN
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.90 37.90 5.40 5.40 18.30 18.30 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.90 37.90 5.40 5.40 18.30 18.30 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6
*5240.00
*5240.00 5350.00 5350.00
#10480.00
#10480.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6
*5240.00
*5240.00 5350.00 5350.00
#10480.00
#10480.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 28 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11n (40MHz) EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 38 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0
-17.9
-10.7 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) ANTENNA HEIGHT 162 162 125 125 148 148 TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.20 H 1.20 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.32 H 1.32 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION RAW LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 56.1 PK 51.00 43.3 AV 38.20 97.4 PK 59.60 86.7 AV 48.90 58.0 PK 40.40 47.1 AV 29.50 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 57.80 45.40 72.20 62.10 41.60 31.60 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 62.9 PK 50.5 AV 110.0 PK 99.9 AV 59.2 PK 49.2 AV
(m) 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.15 V 1.15 V TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) 3 3 359 359 74 74 ANTENNA HEIGHT LIMIT
(dBuV/m)
-16.0
-6.9
-14.8
-4.8
-11.1
-3.5 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 MARGIN
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 5.10 5.10 37.80 37.80 17.60 17.60 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 5.10 5.10 37.80 37.80 17.60 17.60 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 5150.00 5150.00
*5190.00
*5190.00
#10380.00
#10380.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 5150.00 5150.00
*5190.00
*5190.00
#10380.00
#10380.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 29 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 46 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN LIMIT
(dBuV/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 ANTENNA HEIGHT
-17.6
-9.6
-15.2
-6.2 125 125 130 130 221 221 TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.10 H 1.10 H 1.45 H 1.45 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION RAW LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 97.3 PK 59.40 87.1 AV 49.20 56.4 PK 51.00 44.4 AV 39.00 58.8 PK 40.70 47.8 AV 29.70 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 72.30 62.00 53.60 40.30 42.60 31.30 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 110.2 PK 99.9 AV 59.0 PK 45.7 AV 60.7 PK 49.4 AV
(m) 1.20 V 1.20 V 1.36 V 1.36 V 1.36 V 1.36 V TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) 358 358 325 325 58 58
-15.0
-8.3
-13.3
-4.6 ANTENNA HEIGHT 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) MARGIN
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.90 37.90 5.40 5.40 18.10 18.10 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 37.90 37.90 5.40 5.40 18.10 18.10 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6
*5230.00
*5230.00 5350.00 5350.00
#10460.00
#10460.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6
*5230.00
*5230.00 5350.00 5350.00
#10460.00
#10460.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 30 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11ac (80MHz) EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 42 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE 1 ~ 40GHz DETECTOR Peak (PK) FUNCTION Average (AV) ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin
(dB) MARGIN 74.0 54.0
-17.9
-9.9 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 ANTENNA HEIGHT
-16.7
-9.7
-15.1
-6.4 69 69 9 9 98 98 95 95 TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
(m) 1.12 H 1.12 H 1.00 H 1.00 H 1.55 H 1.55 H 1.32 H 1.32 H ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION RAW LEVEL VALUE
(dBuV/m)
(dBuV) 56.1 PK 51.00 44.1 AV 39.00 89.5 PK 51.70 78.5 AV 40.70 57.3 PK 51.90 44.3 AV 38.90 58.9 PK 41.00 47.6 AV 29.70 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M RAW EMISSION VALUE
(dBuV) 61.80 47.90 64.40 53.90 50.90 39.40 42.90 30.60 LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 66.9 PK 53.0 AV 102.2 PK 91.7 AV 56.3 PK 44.8 AV 60.8 PK 48.5 AV
(m) 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.00 V 1.33 V 1.33 V 1.32 V 1.32 V 13 13 351 351 205 205 69 69 TABLE ANGLE
(Degree)
-17.7
-9.2
-13.2
-5.5 ANTENNA HEIGHT 74.0 54.0 74.0 54.0 LIMIT
(dBuV/m) 74.0 54.0 MARGIN
-7.1
-1.0
(dB) CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 5.10 5.10 37.80 37.80 5.40 5.40 17.90 17.90 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m) 5.10 5.10 37.80 37.80 5.40 5.40 17.90 17.90 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5150.00 5150.00
*5210.00
*5210.00 5350.00 5350.00
#10420.00
#10420.00 NO. FREQ.
(MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5150.00 5150.00
*5210.00
*5210.00 5350.00 5350.00
#10420.00
#10420.00 REMARKS:
1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) Pre-Amplifier Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value 5. * : Fundamental frequency. 6. "#":The radiated frequency is out the restricted band. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 31 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 BELOW 1GHz WORST-CASE DATA802.11n (40MHz) EUT TEST CONDITION CHANNEL Channel 46 INPUT POWER 120Vac, 60Hz MEASUREMENT DETAIL FREQUENCY RANGE Below 1000MHz DETECTOR FUNCTION Quasi-Peak ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 25deg. C, 65%RH TESTED BY Chris Lin NO. FREQ. (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 208.42 375.29 600.38 749.79 875.91 961.29 RAW VALUE LIMIT TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: HORIZONTAL AT 3 M EMISSION ANTENNA HEIGHT (m)
(dBuV)
(dBuV/m) MARGIN (dB) LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 27.2 QP 43.90 39.1 QP 50.00 30.8 QP 36.90 30.4 QP 33.60 34.9 QP 35.90 50.2 QP 49.50 ANTENNA POLARITY & TEST DISTANCE: VERTICAL AT 3 M EMISSION 1.25 H 1.00 H 1.50 H 1.00 H 1.25 H 1.50 H
-16.3
-6.9
-15.2
-15.6
-11.1
-3.8 43.5 46.0 46.0 46.0 46.0 54.0 95 213 11 144 217 12 RAW VALUE MARGIN (dB) ANTENNA HEIGHT (m) TABLE ANGLE
(Degree) NO. FREQ. (MHz) 1 2 3 4 5 6 57.07 154.09 375.29 480.07 625.60 961.29 REMARKS:
LEVEL
(dBuV/m) 30.5 QP 26.9 QP 38.7 QP 30.8 QP 35.2 QP 45.0 QP LIMIT
(dBuV/m) 40.0 43.5 46.0 46.0 46.0 54.0
-9.5
-16.6
-7.3
-15.2
-10.8
-9.0 1.25 V 1.00 V 1.50 V 1.00 V 1.25 V 1.50 V 344 163 190 155 270 194
(dBuV) 45.40 40.40 49.60 39.50 40.70 44.30 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m)
-16.70
-10.90
-6.10
-3.20
-1.00 0.70 CORRECTION FACTOR
(dB/m)
-14.90
-13.50
-10.90
-8.70
-5.50 0.70 1. Emission Level(dBuV/m) = Raw Value(dBuV) + Correction Factor(dB/m) 2. Correction Factor(dB/m) = Antenna Factor(dB/m) + Cable Factor(dB) 3. The other emission levels were very low against the limit. 4. Margin value = Emission Level Limit value Pre-Amplifier Factor (dB) Report No.: RF130829C04-1 32 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.2 CONDUCTED EMISSION MEASUREMENT 4.2.1 LIMITS OF CONDUCTED EMISSION MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY OF EMISSION (MHz) 0.15 ~ 0.5 0.5 ~ 5 5 ~ 30 CONDUCTED LIMIT (dBV) Average 56 to 46 66 to 56 Quasi-peak 56 60 46 50 NOTE: 1. The lower limit shall apply at the transition frequencies. 2. The limit decreases in line with the logarithm of the frequency in the range of 0.15 to 0.50MHz. 3. All emanations from a class A/B digital device or system, including any network of conductors and apparatus connected thereto, shall not exceed the level of field strengths specified above. 4.2.2 TEST INSTRUMENTS DESCRIPTION &
MANUFACTURER MODEL NO. SERIAL NO. DATE OF CALIBRATION DUE DATE OF CALIBRATION 5D-FB 100289 ESCS30 Nov. 29, 2013 Cable-HYC01-01 Dec. 27, 2013 Test Receiver ROHDE & SCHWARZ RF signal cable Woken LISN ROHDE & SCHWARZ
(EUT) LISN ROHDE & SCHWARZ
(Peripheral) Software ADT NOTE: 1. The calibration interval of the above test instruments is 12 months and the calibrations BV ADT_Cond_ Feb. 13, 2014 Jul. 17, 2013 835239/001 ESH3-Z5 ESH3-Z5 V7.3.7.3 100311 NA NA NA Nov. 28, 2014 Dec. 26, 2014 Feb. 12, 2015 Jul. 16, 2014 are traceable to NML/ROC and NIST/USA. 2. The test was performed in HwaYa Shielded Room 1. 3. The VCCI Site Registration No. is C-2040. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 33 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.2.3 TEST PROCEDURES a. The EUT was placed 0.4 meters from the conducting wall of the shielded room with EUT being connected to the power mains through a line impedance stabilization network (LISN). Other support units were connected to the power mains through another LISN. The two LISNs provide 50 ohm/ 50uH of coupling impedance for the measuring instrument. b. Both lines of the power mains connected to the EUT were checked for maximum conducted interference. c. The frequency range from 150kHz to 30MHz was searched. Emission levels under (Limit - 20dB) was not recorded. NOTE: All modes of operation were investigated and the worst-case emissions are reported. 4.2.4 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD No deviation. 4.2.5 TEST SETUP Ve rtic a l G ro u n d R e fe re n c e P la n e Te s t R e c e iv e r 4 0 c m E U T L IS N 8 0 c m H o riz o n ta l G ro u n d R e fe re n c e P la n e N o te : 1 .S u p p o rt u n its w e re c o n n e c te d to s e c o n d L IS N . 2 .B o th o f L IS N s (A M N ) a re 8 0 c m fro m E U T a n d a t le a s t 8 0 fro m o th e r u n its a n d o th e r m e ta l p la n e s For the actual test configuration, please refer to the attached file (Test Setup Photo). 4.2.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITIONS Same as 4.1.6. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 34 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.2.7 TEST RESULTS CONDUCTED WORST-CASE DATA802.11n (40MHz) PHASE CHANNEL Line 1 Channel 46 6dB BANDWIDTH 9kHz No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Freq.
[MHz]
0.15782 0.17737 0.21256 0.47789 1.69836 3.80585 Corr. Factor
(dB) 0.11 0.10 0.09 0.12 0.24 0.26 Reading Value
[dB (uV)]
Q.P. AV. 46.32 30.27 43.21 28.59 37.66 22.77 29.31 24.96 17.79 13.97 19.55 15.11 Emission Level
[dB (uV)]
AV. 30.38 28.69 22.86 25.08 14.21 15.37 Q.P. 46.43 43.31 37.75 29.43 18.03 19.81 Limit
[dB (uV)]
AV. 55.58 54.61 53.10 46.38 46.00 46.00 Q.P. 65.58 64.61 63.10 56.38 56.00 56.00 Margin
(dB) Q.P.
-19.15
-21.30
-25.35
-26.94
-37.97
-36.19 AV.
-25.20
-25.92
-30.24
-21.29
-31.79
-30.63 REMARKS:
1. Q.P. and AV. are abbreviations of quasi-peak and average individually. 2. The emission levels of other frequencies were very low against the limit. 3. Margin value = Emission level - Limit value 4. Correction factor = Insertion loss + Cable loss 5. Emission Level = Correction Factor + Reading Value Report No.: RF130829C04-1 35 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 Freq. No
[MHz]
0.16173 0.18128 0.21647 0.44624 0.92587 5.52625 1 2 3 4 5 6 REMARKS:
PHASE CHANNEL Line 2 Channel 46 6dB BANDWIDTH 9kHz Corr. Factor
(dB) 0.06 0.08 0.10 0.17 0.21 0.33 Reading Value
[dB (uV)]
Q.P. AV. 45.25 30.55 42.47 26.94 36.91 21.98 27.08 22.72 21.20 17.38 16.08 10.49 Emission Level
[dB (uV)]
AV. 30.61 27.02 22.08 22.89 17.59 10.82 Q.P. 45.31 42.55 37.01 27.25 21.41 16.41 Limit
[dB (uV)]
AV. 55.37 54.43 52.95 46.94 46.00 50.00 Q.P. 65.37 64.43 62.95 56.94 56.00 60.00 Margin
(dB) Q.P.
-20.07
-21.88
-25.95
-29.69
-34.59
-43.59 AV.
-24.77
-27.41
-30.88
-24.05
-28.41
-39.18 1. Q.P. and AV. are abbreviations of quasi-peak and average individually. 2. The emission levels of other frequencies were very low against the limit. 3. Margin value = Emission level - Limit value 4. Correction factor = Insertion loss + Cable loss 5. Emission Level = Correction Factor + Reading Value Report No.: RF130829C04-1 36 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.3 PEAK TRANSMIT POWER MEASUREMENT 4.3.1 LIMITS OF PEAK TRANSMIT POWER MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY BAND 5.150 ~ 5.250GHz 5.250 ~ 5.350GHz 5.470 ~ 5.725GHz LIMIT The lesser of 50mW (17dBm) or 4dBm + 10logB The lesser of 250mW (24dBm) or 11dBm + 10logB The lesser of 250mW (24dBm) or 11dBm + 10logB NOTE: Where B is the 26dB emission bandwidth in MHz. Per KDB 662911 D01 Multiple Transmitter Output v02r01 Method of conducted output power measurement on IEEE 802.11 devices, Array Gain = 0 dB (i.e., no array gain) for NANT 4;
Array Gain = 0 dB (i.e., no array gain) for channel widths 40 MHz for any NANT;
Array Gain = 5 log(NANT/NSS) dB or 3 dB, whichever is less for 20-MHz channel widths with NANT 5. For power measurements on all other devices: Array Gain = 10 log(NANT/NSS) dB. 4.3.2 TEST SETUP Power Sensor EUT FOR POWER OUTPUT MEASUREMENT For 802.11a, 802.11n (20MHz), 802.11n (40MHz) 10dB ATTENUATION PAD For 802.11ac (80MHz) FOR 26dB BANDWIDTH EUT EUT 10dB ATTENUATION PAD 10dB ATTENUATION PAD Power Meter SPECTRUM ANALYZER SPECTRUM ANALYZER Report No.: RF130829C04-1 37 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.3.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS Refer to section 4.1.3 to get information of above instrument. 4.3.4 TEST PROCEDURE FOR AVERAGE POWER MEASUREMENT For 802.11a, 802.11n (20MHz), 802.11n (40MHz) Method PM is used to perform output power measurement, trigger and gating function of wide band power meter is enabled to measure max output power of TX on burst. Duty factor is not added to measured value. For 802.11ac (80MHz) Method SA-1 1) Set span to encompass the entire emission bandwidth (EBW) of the signal. 2) Set RBW = 1 MHz. 3) Set VBW 3 MHz. 4) Number of points in sweep 2 Span / RBW. 5) Sweep time = auto. 6) Set trigger to free run (duty cycle98 percent); Set video trigger (duty cycle<98 percent) 7) Detector = RMS. 8) Trace average at least 100 traces in power averaging mode 9) Compute power by integrating the spectrum across the 26 dB EBW of the signal. FOR 26dB BANDWIDTH 1) Set RBW = approximately 1% of the emission bandwidth. 2) Set the VBW > RBW. 3) Detector = Peak. 4) Trace mode = max hold. 5) Measure the maximum width of the emission that is 26 dB down from the peak of the emission. Compare this with the RBW setting of the analyzer. Readjust RBW and repeat measurement as needed until the RBW/EBW ratio is approximately 1%. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 38 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.3.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD No deviation. 4.3.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITIONS The software provided by client to enable the EUT under transmission condition continuously at specific channel frequencies individually. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 39 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.3.7 TEST RESULTS POWER OUTPUT:
802.11a CHAN. 36 40 48 CHAN. FREQ.
(MHz) 5180 5200 5240 NOTE:
CHAIN 0 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log 3. 4dBm + 10log CHAIN 1 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log 3. 4dBm + 10log CHAIN 2 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log 3. 4dBm + 10log AVERAGE POWER (dBm) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 TOTAL POWER
(mW) TOTAL POWER
(dBm) POWER LIMIT
(dBm) 9.24 9.56 9.27 9.69 9.86 8.24 9.35 9.39 9.24 26.316 27.409 23.516 14.20 14.38 13.71 17 17 17 PASS /
FAIL PASS PASS PASS
( 21.98 ) = 17.42 >
( 22.44 ) = 17.51 >
( 22.68 ) = 17.56 >
( 22.37 ) = 17.50 >
( 22.18 ) = 17.46 >
( 22.29 ) = 17.48 >
( 22.52 ) = 17.53 >
( 21.95 ) = 17.41 >
( 23.30 ) = 17.67 >
17dBm 17dBm 17dBm 17dBm 17dBm 17dBm 17dBm 17dBm 17dBm Report No.: RF130829C04-1 40 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11n (20MHz) CHAN. 36 40 48 CHAN. FREQ.
(MHz) 5180 5200 5240 NOTE:
CHAIN 0 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log 3. 4dBm + 10log CHAIN 1 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log 3. 4dBm + 10log CHAIN 2 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log 3. 4dBm + 10log 802.11n (40MHz) CHAN. 38 46 CHAN. FREQ.
(MHz) 5190 5230 NOTE:
CHAIN 0 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log CHAIN 1 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log CHAIN 2 1. 4dBm + 10log 2. 4dBm + 10log AVERAGE POWER (dBm) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 TOTAL POWER
(mW) TOTAL POWER
(dBm) POWER LIMIT
(dBm) 9.59 9.74 9.71 9.95 9.62 9.71 9.51 9.49 9.68 27.918 27.473 27.998 14.46 14.39 14.47 17 17 17 PASS /
FAIL PASS PASS PASS
( 23.26 ) = 17.67 > 17dBm
( 23.03 ) = 17.62 > 17dBm
( 22.28 ) = 17.48 > 17dBm
( 22.64 ) = 17.55 > 17dBm
( 22.84 ) = 17.59 > 17dBm
( 23.31 ) = 17.68 > 17dBm
( 22.55 ) = 17.53 > 17dBm
( 23.34 ) = 17.68 > 17dBm
( 23.18 ) = 17.65 > 17dBm AVERAGE POWER (dBm) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 TOTAL POWER
(mW) TOTAL POWER
(dBm) POWER LIMIT
(dBm) 12.12 12.19 12.01 12.02 11.45 11.78 46.815 46.873 16.70 16.71 17 17 PASS /
FAIL PASS PASS
( 48.79 ) = 20.88 > 17dBm
( 49.51 ) = 20.95 > 17dBm
( 47.37 ) = 20.76 > 17dBm
( 48.58 ) = 20.86 > 17dBm
( 48.25 ) = 20.83 > 17dBm
( 49.08 ) = 20.91 > 17dBm Report No.: RF130829C04-1 41 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11ac (80MHz) CHAN. CHAN. FREQ.
(MHz) AVERAGE POWER (dBm) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 TOTAL POWER
(mW) TOTAL POWER
(dBm) POWER LIMIT
(dBm) PASS /
FAIL 42 5210 7.58 7.23 7.03 16.059 12.06 17 PASS NOTE:
CHAIN 0 1. 4dBm + 10log CHAIN 1 1. 4dBm + 10log CHAIN 2 1. 4dBm + 10log
( 93.79 ) = 23.72 > 17dBm
( 93.77 ) = 23.72 > 17dBm
( 94.06 ) = 23.73 > 17dBm Report No.: RF130829C04-1 42 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 26dB BANDWIDTH:
802.11a CHANNEL CHANNEL FREQUENCY
(MHz) 26dBc BANDWIDTH (MHz) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 PASS / FAIL 36 40 48 5180 5200 5240 21.98 22.44 22.68 22.37 22.18 22.29 22.52 21.95 23.30 PASS PASS PASS 802.11n (20MHz) CHANNEL CHANNEL FREQUENCY
(MHz) 26dBc BANDWIDTH (MHz) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 PASS / FAIL 36 40 48 5180 5200 5240 23.26 23.03 22.28 22.64 22.84 23.31 22.55 23.34 23.18 PASS PASS PASS 802.11n (40MHz) CHANNEL CHANNEL FREQUENCY
(MHz) 26dBc BANDWIDTH (MHz) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 PASS / FAIL 38 46 5190 5230 48.79 49.51 47.37 48.58 48.25 49.08 PASS PASS 802.11ac (80MHz) CHANNEL CHANNEL FREQUENCY
(MHz) 26dBc BANDWIDTH (MHz) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 PASS / FAIL 42 5210 93.79 93.77 94.06 PASS Report No.: RF130829C04-1 43 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11a SPECTRUM PLOT OF WORST VALUE 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 802.11ac (80MHz) Report No.: RF130829C04-1 44 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.4 PEAK POWER SPECTRAL DENSITY MEASUREMENT 4.4.1 LIMITS OF PEAK POWER SPECTRAL DENSITY MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY BAND 5.150 ~ 5.250GHz 5.250 ~ 5.350GHz 5.470 ~ 5.725GHz LIMIT 4dBm 11dBm 11dBm 4.4.2 TEST SETUP EUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER 10dB ATTENUATION PAD 4.4.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS Refer to section 4.1.3 to get information of above instrument. 4.4.4 TEST PROCEDURES Using method SA-1 alternative 1) Set span to encompass the entire emission bandwidth (EBW) of the signal. 2) Set RBW = 30 KHz, Set VBW 1 MHz, Detector = RMS 3) Set Channel power measure = 1MHz 4) Sweep time = 30ms. 5) Perform a single sweep. 6) Record the max value 4.4.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD No deviation. 4.4.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITIONS Same as 4.3.6. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 45 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.4.7 TEST RESULTS 802.11a CHAN. 36 40 48 CHAN. FREQ.
(MHz) 5180 5200 5240 PSD (dBm) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2
-5.19
-4.15
-4.28
-4.22
-3.45
-4.22
-4.14
-4.58
-4.52 TOTAL PSD W/O DUTY FACTOR
(dBm) 0.26 0.82 0.36 DUTY FACTOR 0.12 0.12 0.12 TOTAL PSD WITH DUTY FACTOR
(dBm) 0.38 0.94 0.48 MAX. LIMIT
(dBm) PASS /
FAIL 1.13 PASS 1.13 PASS 1.13 PASS NOTE:
1. Method 1 of power density measurement of KDB 662911 is using for calculating total power density. Total power density is summing entire spectra across corresponding frequency bins on the various outputs by computer. 2. Directional gain = 4.1dBi + 10log(3) = 8.87dBi > 6dBi , so the power density limit shall be reduced to 4-(8.87-6) = 1.13dBm. 3. Refer to section 3.3 for duty cycle spectrum plot. 802.11n (20MHz) CHAN. 36 40 48 CHAN. FREQ.
(MHz) 5180 5200 5240 PSD (dBm) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2
-3.48
-3.47
-4.65
-4.13
-4.37
-4.15
-4.11
-4.41
-4.13 TOTAL PSD W/O DUTY FACTOR
(dBm) 0.94 0.56 0.56 DUTY FACTOR 0.14 0.14 0.14 TOTAL PSD WITH DUTY FACTOR
(dBm) 1.08 0.70 0.70 MAX. LIMIT
(dBm) 1.13 1.13 1.13 PASS /
FAIL PASS PASS PASS NOTE:
1. Method 1 of power density measurement of KDB 662911 is using for calculating total power density. Total power density is summing entire spectra across corresponding frequency bins on the various outputs by computer. 2. Directional gain = 4.1dBi + 10log(3) = 8.87dBi > 6dBi , so the power density limit shall be reduced to 4-(8.87-6) = 1.13dBm. 3. Refer to section 3.3 for duty cycle spectrum plot. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 46 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11n (40MHz) CHAN. 38 46 CHAN. FREQ.
(MHz) 5190 5230 PSD (dBm) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2
-3.14
-3.38
-5.57 TOTAL PSD W/O DUTY FACTOR
(dBm) 0.87
-3.41
-3.14
-5.87 0.79 DUTY FACTOR 0.25 0.25 TOTAL PSD WITH DUTY FACTOR
(dBm) 1.12 MAX. LIMIT
(dBm) PASS /
FAIL 1.13 PASS 1.04 1.13 PASS NOTE:
1. Method 1 of power density measurement of KDB 662911 is using for calculating total power density. Total power density is summing entire spectra across corresponding frequency bins on the various outputs by computer. 2. Directional gain = 4.1dBi + 10log(3) = 8.87dBi > 6dBi , so the power density limit shall be reduced to 4-(8.87-6) = 1.13dBm. 3. Refer to section 3.3 for duty cycle spectrum plot. 802.11ac (80MHz) CHAN. CHAN. FREQ.
(MHz) PSD (dBm) CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 42 5210
-12.60
-12.62
-12.81 TOTAL PSD W/O DUTY FACTOR
(dBm)
-7.90 DUTY FACTOR 0.54 TOTAL PSD WITH DUTY FACTOR
(dBm)
-7.36 MAX. LIMIT
(dBm) PASS /
FAIL 1.13 PASS NOTE:
1. Method 1 of power density measurement of KDB 662911 is using for calculating total power density. Total power density is summing entire spectra across corresponding frequency bins on the various outputs by computer. 2. Directional gain = 4.1dBi + 10log(3) = 8.87dBi > 6dBi , so the power density limit shall be reduced to 4-(8.87-6) = 1.13dBm. 3. Refer to section 3.3 for duty cycle spectrum plot. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 47 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11a SPECTRUM PLOT OF WORST VALUE 802.11n (20MHz) 802.11n (40MHz) 802.11ac (80MHz) Report No.: RF130829C04-1 48 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.5 PEAK POWER EXCURSION MEASUREMENT 4.5.1 LIMITS OF PEAK POWER EXCURSION MEASUREMENT Shall not exceed 13 dB. 4.5.2 TEST SETUP EUT SPECTRUM ANALYZER 10dB ATTENUATION PAD 4.5.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS Refer to section 4.1.3 to get information of above instrument. 4.5.4 TEST PROCEDURE 1) Set RBW = 1 MHz, VBW 3 MHz, Detector = peak. 2) Trace mode = max-hold. Allow the sweeps to continue until the trace stabilizes. 3) Use the peak search function to find the peak of the spectrum. 4) Measure the PPSD. 5) Compute the ratio of the maximum of the peak-max-hold spectrum to the PPSD. Find the worst channel and modulation mode as above test procedure, and follow KDB 789033 D01 General UNII Test Procedures v01r03 and repeat step 1 to 5 for final testing of each modulation mode on a single channel (all modulation types) in a single operating band to compliance with the peak excursion requirement. 4.5.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD No deviation. 4.5.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITIONS Same as 4.2.6 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 49 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.5.7 TEST RESULTS MODULATION MODE 802.11a 802.11n
(20MHz) 802.11n
(40MHz) 802.11ac
(80MHz) MODULATION TYPE BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM BPSK QPSK 16QAM 64QAM 256QAM CHANNEL FREQUENCY
(MHz) 5240 5240 5230 5210 PEAK VALUE
(dBm) 2.74 3.96 3.47 3.98 2.37 3.37 4.94 3.92 4.15 3.35 3.37 4.28
-2.12
-1.63
-1.96
-1.96
-2.21 PPSD
(dBm)
-4.14
-5.75
-5.71
-6.74
-4.11
-6.21
-6.32
-7.53
-3.14
-7.12
-8.00
-8.79
-12.6
-13.02
-14.00
-14.82
-14.88 PEAK EXCURSION
(dB)
-4.02
-5.52
-5.26
-5.86
-3.97
-5.91
-5.86
-6.66
-2.89
-6.61
-7.14
-7.21
-12.06
-12.10
-12.60
-12.76
-12.42 LIMIT
(dB) 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 PASS/
FAIL PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS PASS Report No.: RF130829C04-1 50 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.6 FREQUENCY STABILITY 4.6.1 LIMITS OF FREQUENCY STABILITY MEASUREMENT The frequency of the carrier signal shall be maintained within band of operation Temperature Chamber Spectrum Analyzer 4.6.2 TEST SETUP AC Power Supply 4.6.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS Refer to section 4.1.3 to get information of above instrument. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 51 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.6.4 TEST PROCEDURE a. The EUT was placed inside the environmental test chamber and powered by nominal AC voltage. b. Turn the EUT on and couple its output to a spectrum analyzer. c. Turn the EUT off and set the chamber to the highest temperature specified. d. Allow sufficient time (approximately 30 min) for the temperature of the chamber to stabilize, turn the EUT on and measure the operating frequency after 2, 5, and 10 minutes. e. Repeat step 2 and 3 with the temperature chamber set to the lowest temperature. f. The test chamber was allowed to stabilize at +20 degree C for a minimum of 30 minutes. The supply voltage was then adjusted on the EUT from 85% to 115%
and the frequency record. 4.6.5 DEVIATION FROM TEST STANDARD No deviation. 4.6.6 EUT OPERATING CONDITION Set the EUT transmit at un-modulation mode to test frequency stability. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 52 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.6.7 TEST RESULTS FREQUEMCY STABILITY VERSUS TEMP. OPERATING FREQUENCY: 5200MHz TEMP.
() POWER SUPPLY
(Vac) 0 MINUTE 2 MINUTE 5 MINUTE 10 MINUTE Measured Frequency
(MHz) Frequency Drift
(%) Measured Frequency
(MHz) Frequency Drift
(%) Measured Frequency
(MHz) Frequency Drift
(%) Measured Frequency
(MHz) Frequency Drift
(%) 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 120 5200.0014 0.00003 5199.9975
-0.00005 5199.9934
-0.00013 5199.9944
-0.00011 5200.0225 0.00043 5200.0173 0.00033 5200.0256 0.00049 5200.0171 0.00033 5200.0264 0.00051 5200.0243 0.00047 5200.0299 0.00058 5200.0236 0.00045 5199.9852
-0.00028 5199.9891
-0.00021 5199.9792
-0.00040 5199.9825
-0.00034 5200.0022 0.00004 5200.0004 0.00001 5200.003 0.00006 5200.002 0.00004 5199.9865
-0.00026 5199.9853
-0.00028 5199.9891
-0.00021 5199.986
-0.00027 5200.0061 0.00012 5200.0127 0.00024 5200.0107 0.00021 5200.0093 0.00018 5200.0208 0.00040 5200.0235 0.00045 5200.021 0.00040 5200.0183 0.00035 5200.0048 0.00009 5200.0073 0.00014 5200.0056 0.00011 5200.0068 0.00013 50 40 30 20 10 0
-10
-20
-30 FREQUEMCY STABILITY VERSUS VOLTAGE OPERATING FREQUENCY: 5200MHz 0 MINUTE 2 MINUTE 5 MINUTE 10 MINUTE Measured Frequency
(MHz) Frequency Drift
(%) Measured Frequency
(MHz) Frequency Drift
(%) Measured Frequency
(MHz) Frequency Drift
(%) Measured Frequency
(MHz) Frequency Drift
(%) 5199.9858
-0.00027 5199.9891
-0.00021 5199.9797
-0.00039 5199.9815
-0.00036 5199.9852
-0.00028 5199.9891
-0.00021 5199.9792
-0.00040 5199.9825
-0.00034 5199.9858
-0.00027 5199.9901
-0.00019 5199.9802
-0.00038 5199.9822
-0.00034 TEMP.
() POWER SUPPLY
(Vac) 138 120 102 20 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 53 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.7 20dBc BANDWIDTH MEASUREMENT 4.7.1 LIMITS OF PEAK TRANSMIT POWER MEASUREMENT 20dBc point shall not overlap in 5150~5700MHz. 4.7.2 TEST SETUP EUT 10dB ATTENUATION PAD SPECTRUM ANALYZER 4.7.3 TEST INSTRUMENTS Refer to section 4.1.3 to get information of above instrument. 4.7.4 TEST PROCEDURE 789033 D01 General UNII Test Procedures v01r03 Emission bandwidth 1) Set RBW = approximately 1% of the emission bandwidth. 2) Set the VBW > RBW. 3) Detector = Peak. 4) Trace mode = max hold. 5) Measure the maximum width of the emission that is 20 dB down from the peak of the emission. Compare this with the RBW setting of the analyzer. Readjust RBW and repeat measurement as needed until the RBW/EBW ratio is approximately 1%. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 54 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 4.7.5 TEST RESULTS 802.11a 5180 MHz CHAIN 0 5200 MHz CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 CHAIN 2 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 55 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 5240 MHz CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 56 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11n (20MHz) 5180 MHz CHAIN 0 5200 MHz CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 CHAIN 2 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 57 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 5240 MHz CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 58 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11n (40MHz) 5190 MHz CHAIN 0 5230 MHz CHAIN 0 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 1 CHAIN 2 CHAIN 2 Report No.: RF130829C04-1 59 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 802.11ac (80MHz) 5210 MHz CHAIN 0 5168.19MHz + 81.29MHz = 5249.48MHz < 5250MHz CHAIN 1 5169.86MHz + 80.06MHz = 5249.92MHz < 5250MHz CHAIN 2 5168.46MHz + 81.05MHz = 5249.51MHz < 5250MHz Report No.: RF130829C04-1 60 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 5. PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE TEST CONFIGURATION Please refer to the attached file (Test Setup Photo). Report No.: RF130829C04-1 61 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 6. INFORMATION ON THE TESTING LABORATORIES We, Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch, were founded in 1988 to provide our best service in EMC, Radio, Telecom and Safety consultation. Our laboratories are accredited and approved according to ISO/IEC 17025. If you have any comments, please feel free to contact us at the following:
Hsin Chu EMC/RF Lab:
Tel: 886-3-5935343 Fax: 886-3-5935342 Linko EMC/RF Lab:
Tel: 886-2-26052180 Fax: 886-2-26051924 Hwa Ya EMC/RF/Safety Telecom Lab:
Tel: 886-3-3183232 Fax: 886-3-3270892 Email: service.adt@tw.bureauveritas.com Web Site: www.bureauveritas-adt.com The address and road map of all our labs can be found in our web site also. Report No.: RF130829C04-1 62 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0 7. APPENDIX A MODIFICATIONS RECORDERS FOR ENGINEERING CHANGES TO THE EUT BY THE LAB No modifications were made to the EUT by the lab during the test.
---END---
Report No.: RF130829C04-1 63 of 63 Report Format Version 5.2.0
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2017-10-11 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II Permissive Change |
2 | 2017-10-10 | 5150 ~ 5250 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |
3 | 2016-06-20 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
4 | 5745 ~ 5825 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||
5 | 2014-04-14 | 5180 ~ 5240 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
6 | 5745 ~ 5825 | DTS - Digital Transmission System |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Effective |
2017-10-11
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2017-10-10
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2016-06-20
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2014-04-14
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
TP-Link Technologies Co., Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0013661145
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
Building 24 (floors 1,3,4,5) and 28 (floors1-4), Central Science and Technology Park,Nanshan
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Building 24 (floors 1,3,4,5) and 28 (floors1-4)
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Shenzhen, N/A
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
China
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@acbcert.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grantee Code |
TE7
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Product Code |
C7V2
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
J******** H********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Title |
Regulatory Compliance Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
75521********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
75526********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
c******@tp-link.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas Shenzhen Co., Ltd. Dongguan Branch
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
QuieTek Technology (Suzhou) Co.,Ltd.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.)
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
S****** T********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
H****** Z********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
R**** H****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
No. 34, Chenwulu Section, Guantai Rd., Houjie Town
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
No.99 Hongye RD.Suzhou Industrial Park
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
No. 19 Hwa Ya 2nd Rd, Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Dongguan, 523942
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Suzhou, 215006
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Taoyuan Hsien
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
China
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
86-76******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
86-05******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
88633******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
86-76********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
86-05********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
s******@cn.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
h******@quietek.com.cn
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
QuieTek Technology (Suzhou) Co.,Ltd.
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Bureau Veritas Consumer Products Services (H.K.)
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
Y******** L******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
A**** W********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
No.99 Hongye RD.Suzhou Industrial Park
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
No. 19 Hwa Ya 2nd Rd, Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Suzhou, 215006
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Taoyuan Hsien
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
China
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
86-05******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
88633******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
86-05********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
y******@quietek.com.cn
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
a******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | No | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | AC1750 Wireless Dual Band Gigabit Router | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II Permissive Change | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grant Comments | Class II permissive change to update the firmware. Power Output listed is conducted. Device is an 802.11n device in a 3x3 Spatial Multiplexing MIMO configuration as described in this filing. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and not be co-located with any other transmitters except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device has a 20 MHz and 40 MHz Bandwidth for WLAN function and has 80 MHz for 5 GHz function. It contains 5GHz WLAN. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Class II permissive change to update the firmware. Power Output listed is conducted. Device is an 802.11n device in a 3x3 Spatial Multiplexing MIMO configuration as described in this filing. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and not be co-located with any other transmitters except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This composite device is restricted to indoor only operations within the 5150-5250 MHz band. This device has a 20 MHz, 40 MHz and 80 MHz Bandwidth for WLAN function. It contains 2.4 GHz WLAN. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Class II permissive change to update standard. Power Output listed is conducted. Device is an 802.11n device in a 3x3 Spatial Multiplexing MIMO configuration as described in this filing. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and not be co-located with any other transmitters except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device has a 20 MHz and 40 MHz Bandwidth for WLAN function and has 80 MHz for 5 GHz function. It contains 5GHz WLAN. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Class II permissive change to update standards. Power Output listed is conducted. Device is an 802.11n device in a 3x3 Spatial Multiplexing MIMO configuration as described in this filing. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and not be co-located with any other transmitters except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This composite device is restricted to indoor only operations within the 5150-5250 MHz band. This device has a 20 MHz, 40 MHz and 80 MHz Bandwidth for WLAN function. It contains 2.4 GHz WLAN. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power Output listed is conducted. Device is an 802.11n device in a 3x3 Spatial Multiplexing MIMO configuration as described in this filing. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and not be co-located with any other transmitters except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This composite device is restricted to indoor only operations within the 5150-5250 MHz band. This device has a 20 MHz, 40 MHz and 80 MHz Bandwidth for WLAN function. it contains 2.4 GHz WLAN. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Power Output listed is conducted. Device is an 802.11n device in a 3x3 Spatial Multiplexing MIMO configuration as described in this filing. The antennas used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and not be co-located with any other transmitters except in accordance with FCC multi-transmitter product procedures. End-users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device has a 20 MHz and 40 MHz Bandwidth for WLAN function and has 80 MHz for 5 GHz function. it contains 5GHz WLAN. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
Bureau Veritas Shenzhen Co., Ltd. Dongguan Branch
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
DEKRA Testing and Certification (Suzhou) Co., Ltd.
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd., Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
A****** H******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
J**** P******
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
K**** L****
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
86 76********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
86-51******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
+886-******** Extension:
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
86-51********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
+886-********
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
a******@cn.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
j******@quietek.com.cn
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
k******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3870000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5150.00000000 | 5250.00000000 | 0.0143500 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.3870000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15E | 38 CC MO | 5180 | 5240 | 0.047 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 2 | 15E | 38 49 CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.146 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15E | CC MO | 5180.00000000 | 5240.00000000 | 0.0470000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 15C | CC MO | 2412 | 2462 | 0.387 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 2 | 15C | CC MO | 5745 | 5825 | 0.146 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC